Home

IBM 4400 Laptop User Manual

1. 62 Edit Mode coectetuer ede erae e nenas 63 eerte eta t M caeca distent niebla 63 Control Code Index sssssssssssssseseeeeeenn nennen 64 Alternate Character Set Deselect Shift In 65 Alternate Character Set Select Shift Out 65 Carriage enne enne nnns 66 Compressed ree ete he Eq tds 67 D lete ete Re puri eee TiS 68 Electronic Vertical Format Unit 68 Elongated Characters Double High 69 Form E660 tine ee eee xn E ati leche 69 Eirie Feed xx ee e eed ecd E dun a ele a 70 Line Spacing 8 or 10 3 70 Plot Even Dot P Series XQ High Density Graphics 71 Plot Odd Dot P Series XQ Normal Density Graphics 72 Table of Contents Select Letter Gothic 72 73 Underline iti e dagen e eher e gei 73 Vertical equ cep Ue ek 74 4 Serial Matrix Printer Protocol 75 oio RM IEEE 75 Serial Matrix Default Values and 76 Configuring the Serial Ma
2. ASCII Data Bits Channel Hex Dec Code PI 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 0 NUL 1 X Xx X 0 0 0 0 0 1 01 1 SOH 1 X X X 0 0 0 0 1 2 02 2 STX 1 X X X 0 0 0 1 0 3 03 3 ETX 1 X X X 0 0 0 1 1 4 04 4 EOT 1 X X X 0 0 1 0 0 5 05 5 1 X X X 0 0 1 0 1 6 06 6 ACK 1 X X X 0 0 1 1 0 7 07 7 BEL 1 X X X 0 0 1 1 1 8 08 8 BS 1 X X X 0 1 0 0 0 9 09 9 HT 1 X X X 0 1 0 0 1 10 0A 10 LF 1 X X X 0 1 0 1 0 11 0B 11 VT 1 X X X 0 1 0 1 1 12 VT 0C 12 FF 1 X X X 0 1 1 0 0 13 OD 13 CR 1 X X X 0 1 1 0 1 14 OE 14 SO 1 X 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 15 OF 15 Sl 1 X 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 16 6E 110 n 1 X 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 Start Load 6F 111 1 X 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 End Load X Undefined 0 or 1 1 High 0 Low 275 Chapter 9 P Series EVFU Table 78 P Series EVFU Codes PI Line Disabled or Not Used ASCII Data Bits Channel Hex Dec Code 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 16 DLE 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 TOF 11 17 DC1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 2 12 18 DC2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 3 13 19 DC3 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 114 14 20 DC4 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 5 15 21 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 16 16 22 SYN 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 7 17 23 ETB 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 8 18 24 CAN 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 9 19 25 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 10 1 26 SUB 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 11 1B 27 ESC 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 12 VT 1C 28 FS 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 13 1D 29 GS 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 14 1E 30 RS 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 Start Load 1F 31 US 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 En
3. 164 Delete Character esses eene 164 Double High Print Set Reset sssssssssseneree 165 Double StriKe eade ERR 165 Double Strike Cancel 166 Double Wide Printera 166 Double Wide Print 1 Line 167 Double Wide Print 1 Line 167 Emphasized Print eee ect Eidi iiaia 168 Emphasized Print 168 Enable Printing Hex Codes 00 1F and 80 9F 169 Table of Contents Form tsm abate ticis 171 Graphics Standard Density 171 Graphics Double Density 172 Graphics Double Density Double 173 Graphics Quadruple Density sse 174 Half Speed Mode On Off eessssssssssseeeennnes 174 Horizontal Tab Execute 175 Horizontal Tab Set Release 175 Initialize 176 ftalic Printing sco on hc er 176 Italic Printing Cancel 176 LIN GSP eed d tette tte eee use tides ad iain 177 Lin
4. 187 Select Vertical Tab Channel 187 Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position in 1 60 Inch 188 Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1 188 Set Intercharacter Spacing in n 120 188 Set Margin LER eet tt Eta ret Pere 189 Set Margin Right sss 189 Set Forms Length by 2 2 190 Table of Contents Set Forms Length in Inches ssssssseeeeeees 190 Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in n 120 Inch 191 Set Vertical Tabs in Channels sse 191 Skip Over Perforation ssssssssssseseeeneneeennn nes 192 Skip Over Perforation Cancel 192 Super Set Commands sss 192 Superscript and Subscript 193 Superscript and Subscript Printing 193 Underline ia Eee eee eene antea 194 Unidirectional Printing 1 Line 194 Unidirectional Printing Set Reset 194 Vertical Tab Execute 195 Vertical Tab SeUGleat centies eec te be tea d Rd 195 7 Super Set Programming
5. E 27 Attribute Set and Reset 27 Control Code Reference 28 Backspag8 uta pa tbe da res p cake d TERT D edi 30 BOM 30 Bold esencia 31 Bold Print Heset i teen EE 31 Carriage etum uote oet ere aate 32 Character Set Select trennt true e EORR Sea aen 33 Characters 80 9F Control 35 Characters 80 9F Printable 35 Character Set Select ECMA 94 Latin 1 Extended 36 Character Set Select International Languages 37 Elongated Double High Print One Line Only 38 Elongated Double High Print 39 Emphasized Pritit eniin Et 40 Emphasized Print ReSet ccccessecceeeeeseeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeneeeneeeseneeees 40 Emulation ReSet 31 ended 40 Expanded Double Wide 41 Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only 41 Extended Character Set caste 42 Extended Character Set Cancel Primary Character Set Select sss
6. 273 End Load Code Hex 1F or 6F sss 274 Using the ere meten 274 Clearing the EVFU Memory 276 Relative Line Slewing ssseeeeeees 277 Serial Matrix VEU 278 Executing Vertical Tabs 279 Vertical Tab Positions 279 A Standard ASCII Character Set 281 Table of Contents B PTR SE TWP a 283 OVOIVIGW iia 55 26h 283 The PTR SETUP Command snte aaa aa ar aak 283 Comimarids zs nti e eem eise 284 C P Series Plot Byte Definition 289 B RIO SS ALY CP 291 Introduction Overview The IBM ASCII Emulation is a software application on two diskettes capable of emulating five different impact printer protocols Printronix P Series P3000 6000 9000 hereafter called P Series Printronix P Series XQ P300 600 hereafter called P Series XQ Printronix Serial Matrix IBM Proprinter IIl XL hereafter called Proprinter XL Epson FX 1050 The software is designed to be compatible with a variety of paper sizes as well as different print engine dots per inch ratios About This Manual This manual is designed so you can quickly find the information you need to
7. Easy to understand Well organized Applicable to your tasks Please tell us how we can improve this book Thank you for your responses May we contact you Yes No When you send comments to IBM you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Name Address Company or Organization Phone No Along Line Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You S l Cut or Fold G544 5733 01 mE Fold and Please do not staple Fold and Tape amt sl NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 40 ARMONK NEW YORK EE SSS POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE ee a IBM Corporation Information Development IBM Printing Systems Department H7FE Building 004M PO Box 1900 Boulder CO 80301 9817 PPLE Cree LEU Creed Le reed Green ry i Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape G544 5733 01 176977 001A Cut or Fold Part Number 10R0529 176977 001A G544 5733 01 10R0529
8. 121 Bit Image Mode Quadruple Density 122 Table of Contents Bold Print S6b c iie Lote ete ebur een etae aee 123 Bold Print Cancel i eei ter lee eee Hee 123 Bottom Margin Set nnns 124 Bottom Margin 124 Garcelzus tet e Pee Pen adie thi ette A eee Peta 124 Carriage Return entente 125 Carriage Return Set inre 125 Character Pitch 12 cpi 126 Characters 80 9F Control 126 Characters 80 9F Printable 126 Condensed Print eese esee ennt 127 Condensed Print Reset 127 Deselect Printer TA RAEE 128 Emphasized Prlht 2 5 ticae 128 Emphasized Print 128 Expanded Double Wide Print sees 129 Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only 130 Expanded Double Wide Print Reset 1 Line 130 geittt s 1 o br 131 Forms Length Set Inches ssssssssseene 131 Forms Length Set Lines ssssssee 132 Horizontal Lab aite NH up dre Ped 132 Horizontal Tab Set Reset sssssssssssseeeeeen 133 Horizontal Ver
9. Space ASCII Code SP Hex Code 20 Dec Code 32 Purpose Produces a blank space no character is printed Comment It is not necessary to pad the end of the print line with space characters The printer automatically fills the line after the line terminator is received The Space character code is also used to skip characters for editing and underlining as described on page 63 Underline ASCII Code Underline key _ Hex Code 5F Dec Code 95 Purpose Underlines specified character positions Comment Tounderline characters the print buffer is first loaded with the character line then the line must be terminated with a Carriage Return code Spaces are then loaded in the buffer at positions not to be underlined and the underline code inserted in the specific positions to be underlined Table 15 illustrates underlining Table 15 Underline Example Enter in Print Buffer Printed Result THE 600 PRINTER CR THE 600 PRINTER ssss LF Key S Space hex 20 LF Line Feed hex OA CR Carriage Return hex OD _ Underline hex 5F 73 Chapter 3 Configuring the XQ Emulation with Control Codes Vertical Tab ASCII Code VT Hex Code 0B Dec Code 11 Purpose Acts as a line terminator when the EVFU is loaded causing the paper to advance to a specified preprogrammed line Comment Vertical Tab is primarily an EVFU line terminator code as described in Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting If the EV
10. The SFCC in P Series is the currently active Special Function Control Code NOTE The super set commands are briefly introduced in the chapters of this book that describe the control codes for each of the emulations listed above In the following subsections the generic code sequence name SSCC is placed before the control code to remind you to enter the correct sequence depending on the printer protocol currently active 197 Chapter 7 _ The Super Set Commands Character Set Selection ASCII Code SSCC Rn Hex Code SSCC 52 Dec Code SSCC82n Purpose Selects one of several character sets Table 44 Epson FX Character Sets n Character Set n Character Set n Character Set 000 IBM Code Page 437 203 Cyrillic 8859 5 405 ELOT 927 Greek 001 IBM Code Page 850 204 ISO 915 406 Greek 851 002 Epson 205 Code Page 855 407 Greek 437 003 OCR A 206 7 Bit Cyrillic 408 Greek 8859 7 004 OCR B 207 Ukrainian 500 Hebrew Old 005 Multinational 300 Latin 2 8859 2 501 Hebrew New 100 ASMO 449 301 Latin 2 852 502 Hebrew DEC 101 ASMO 449 302 Mazovia 503 Hebrew Latin 1 102 ASMO 708 303 Kamenicky 600 Data General Turkish 103 ASMO 708 304 Roman 8 601 DEC Turkish 104 MS DOS CP 710 305 PC 437 Slavic 602 IBM Turkish 105 MS DOS CP 720 306 Slavic 1250 603 Siemens Turkish 106 Sakr CP714 307 Code Page 865 604 PTT Turkish 107 Aptec CP715 308 Code Page 860 605 IBC Turkish 108 CP 786 309 Latin 1 8859 1 606 Bull Turkish 109 Arabic CP864 310 Lati
11. o AN AN AN AN 5 l 2 E E mc No N u 9o9o 7o NI E oon on A N N o Bee Mo oo ACK BEL gt m Q Odo o le m 9 o o 2zlo zle mig msasg o 281 Appendix A 282 B Overview PTR SETUP Option The PTR SETUP commands are a superset of commands which allows the printer to perform several tasks by parsing commands either stored in flash or sent to the printer by the host Commands range from re routing debug statements to downloading complete printer configurations The PTR SETUP Commands Some concepts to keep in mind are as follows 1 PTR SETUP commands are not emulation specific In a system with an IGP the IGP level emulation will process the PTR SETUP commands In a system without an IGP the PTR SETUP commands will be processed by the base emulation The CTHI emulation will not process PTR SETUP commands Since there is no disk on a flash based printer DISK IO commands are now called FILE IO However for backwards compatibility DISK IO and FILE IO are synonymous The PTR SETUP command set is case sensitive all PTR SETUP commands are in upper case characters only The white space separating commands may be any number of spaces and tabs This allows a PTR SETUP file to be formatted for easier readability Any unknown command will terminate the
12. printer configuration menus You can modify a subset of the Epson FX emulation parameters using the control panel keys and LCD display as described in the User s Guide A parameter value set by a host control code generally overrides a value set from the printer s control panel NOTE Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to the printer s NVRAM memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer or reset it to the factory defaults The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the User s Guide To save the configuration using host control codes refer to Appendix B PTR SETUP Option 149 Chapter 6 150 Introduction Epson FX 1050 Default Values and States The factory settings for the Epson FX 1050 emulation menu options are shown in Table 34 Table 35 lists additional factory settings for parameters provided by the ASCII Emulation formatting menus The EMULATION menu options are described in the User s Guide Host control codes can override many of the settings for these menu options Table 34 Epson Emulation Menu Option Factory Settings Characteristic Default Setting Define CR Code Auto LF Define LF Code Printer Select Character Set 20 CPI Condensed CR CR Enable LF LF Disable Epson Set ASCII USA Enable Epson FX 1050 Default Values and States Table 35 ASCII Emulation Menu O
13. Gross Volume Cubic Meters n4 n6 247 Chapter 7 Bar Codes Table 73 UCC EAN 128 Application Identifiers continued Application Identifier Content Format Al 337 Kilograms Per Square Meter 4 6 340 Gross Weight Pounds n4 n6 341 Length Or 1st Dimension Inches Logistics n4 n6 342 Length Or 1st Dimension Feet Logistics n4 n6 343 Length Or 1st Dimension Yards Logistics n4 n6 344 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Inches Logistics n4 n6 345 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Feet Logistics n4 n6 346 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Yards Logistics n4 n6 347 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Inches Logistics n4 n6 348 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Feet Logistics n4 n6 349 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Yards Logistics n4 n6 350 Area Square Inches 4 6 351 Area Square Feet 4 6 352 Area Square Yards 4 6 353 Area Square Inches Logistics n4 n6 354 Area Square Feet Logistics n4 n6 355 Area Square Yards Logistics n4 n6 356 Net Weight Troy Ounce n4 n6 357 Net Volume Ounces 4 6 360 Volume Quarts 4 6 361 Volume Gallons 4 6 362 Gross Volume Quarts 4 6 363 Gross Volume Ga
14. The Telepen structure is shown in Figure 20 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION e miim quii m rm m is ms i m Rd m mn ed Nm med mi m 1 UPPER GUARD BAND 1 m QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET 2l i LOWER GUARD BAND OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 20 Telepen Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning 245 Chapter 7 246 Bar Codes Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent the entire ASCII character set Each narrow bar or space is one element each wide bar or space is three elements each character in the data field has a total of sixteen elements Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The optional modulo 127
15. The vertical tab execute code is VT When sent it prints the contents of the print buffer if data is in the buffer and causes paper position movement to the next predefined vertical tab position If a tab position is not defined the paper position is moved to the next line at the current line spacing If a tab position is at the current line the paper position is moved to the next tab position If no tab positions are defined between the current line and the end of the form the paper position moves to the next TOF Vertical Tab Positions Vertical tab positions are set by line number A maximum of 16 vertical tab positions can be set per channel of the form If the single channel format is used a maximum of 16 vertical tabs can be set for the form A sample single channel format is shown in Figure 37 The first vertical tab is set at line 6 for part number data a second tab is set at line 8 for part name data and a third tab is set at line 14 for quantity data Since this is a single channel format or channel 0 the ESC B code can be used to assign the vertical tabs to the lines of the form Once the tab positions are set sending the vertical tab execute code VT causes the paper position currently at the top of form position to advance to the first tab position for PART NUMBER data Sending another VT moves the paper position to the second tab position for the PART NAME followed by a third VT to access the third tab position fo
16. CONTROL CODE SO SELECTS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING FOR ONE LINE ONLY Double Wide Print 1 Line Cancel ASCII Code DC4 Hex Code 14 Dec Code 20 Purpose X Cancels the double wide print for one line only selected by SO or ESC SO Comment This command cancels the double wide print selected by SO or ESC SO but does not cancel double wide printing selected by ESC W or ESC 167 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Emphasized Print ASCII Code ESC E Hex Code 1B 45 Dec Code 27 69 Purpose Selects emphasized character print format Comment Emphasized print makes text bolder This command is available in both LG Letter Gothic and Courier modes Example The following sample illustrates emphasized character printing CONTROL CODE ESC E SELECTS EMPHASIZED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE ESC F CANCELS EMPHASIZED CHARACTER PRINTING Emphasized Print Cancel ASCII Code ESC F Hex Code 1B 46 Dec Code 27 70 Purpose Cancels emphasized character printing selected by ESC E or ESC Comment This command is available in both LG Letter Gothic and Courier modes 168 Enable Printing Hex Codes 00 1F and 80 9F Enable Printing Hex Codes 00 1F and 80 9F ASCII Code ESC n uppercase i Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment 1B 49 n 27 7 Permits you to print hex codes 00 1F and 80 9F n 1 allows hex codes 00 1F and 80 9F to be printable
17. Comment BS moves the character position indicator one character space to the left at the current character pitch setting The code is ignored if the logical print head is positioned at the first character column Example If you were to print five characters then two BS commands then two characters the output would look like the sample below TTTFF 118 Bell Bell ASCII Code BEL Hex Code 07 Dec Code 7 Purpose Sounds the printer s buzzer beeper Comment The BEL function sounds the buzzer beeper for 0 2 seconds upon receipt of this command Bit Image Mode Single Density ASCII Code ESC K n1 n2 Hex Code 1B 4B n1 n2 Dec Code 2775nin2 Purpose Selects Single Normal Density Bit Image graphics where n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment For detailed information see the Bit Image section in Chapter 8 Graphics Example The following example produces a pattern of Single Density Bit Image graphics The 9 data bit pattern is repeated 27 times Compare this example to the double density and quadruple density examples SINGLE DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS PINS INISISIS DS SIN IISISNISININISNISPISISNSISINISNSINSNISNINSI 11
18. Parameter n6 selects a 4 digit character height in 1 288 inch units TrueType Font Selection ASCII Code SSCC fontname extension Hex Code Dec Code Purpose SSCC 28 fontname 2E extension 3B SSCC 40 fontname 46 extension 59 Selects a TrueType font fontname One to sixteen characters specifying the font name Period character separating the font name and extension extension to six characters specifying the font extension Semicolon character terminates the command 203 Chapter 7 _ The Super Set Commands Form Length and Width The following command sets the form length ASCII Code SSCC KL i n m n I Hex Code SSCC 4B 4C 69 n 6D n 6C n 2E Dec Code SSCC 75 76 105 n 109 n 108 n 46 Comment The brackets indicate optional parameters in the command string Do not include the brackets in your command Only one parameter may be used per command where i nsets the form length in inches n is the number of inches and can be any number of digits but is limited by the maximum form length m n sets the form length in millimeters n is the number of millimeters and can be any number of digits but is limited by the maximum form length n sets the form length in number of lines n is the number of lines and can be any number of digits but is limited by the maximum form length period is the command terminator The following command sets the form width ASCII Code SSCC K W
19. 197 197 The Super Set 5 197 Character Set Selection a aiaa 198 Character Spacing n 240 Inch sse 201 Font Selection TE tette Mister 201 FontSizei sre et pai he erbe ee eiie 202 TrueType Font Selection sssssseee 203 Form Length and 204 Host E onmi Slz6 oe me td hse NER ORE REI MEE 205 Horizontal Movements in Printer Resolution 205 POX ent ees 206 Line Spacing n 288 1 206 Page Orientation Select sse 207 Print Engine Options coin eerte tente heben is 209 Printer Protocol Select 216 Software Page Eject sssssssssssssss eene 216 RETo o JI D 217 Bar Code 218 Australian 4 Stale ib pre e e ee pe e eet 222 Godabal Eu 223 Code mue o M ie mss 225 eat een teta etiam 227 COGS 28 edv eaves ied ieu fete 229 EAN 8 ee etate edid med st Ree deu 234 UN cM PE HEP FR 235 EE eee earner eee 236 Table of Contents E 239 1 241 he deos reed Badan at tile ie d Pha ees 242 PostBa
20. Comment This command is available in all print modes except OCR A and OCR B Character Pitch 15 cpi ASCII Code ESC g Hex Code 1B67 Dec Code 27 103 Purpose Sets character pitch to 15 characters per inch cpi Comment This command is not defined in Epson FX printers It is included in this emulation for compatibility with the Okidata KX P1180 printer This command is available in all print modes except OCR A and OCR B 161 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes MoOOWPrPOHANOUOU KR Character Set Select International Languages ASCII Code ESCR n Hex Code 1B52n Dec Code 2782n Purpose Specifies a language overlay that prints the characters shown Table 20 when the specified code is invoked Table 37 on page 156 provides information on print mode support for each character set where hex 0 through hex E to determine the language overlay shown in Table 38 below Epson only defines character sets through hex C Table 38 Epson International Character Sets Hex Codes International Character Set Is 23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D USA French German English UK Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese Norwegian Danish 11 Spanish II Latin American a iP 0 m o Db fc DM French Canadian Latin American II HHHHHHHDMHHHMBHHH KO Ht tO a Ot gt 9 fa am aan n D m
21. nk NUL ESC 2 ESC 0 ESC 1 ESCAn ESC ESC X n1 n2 ESC Pn ESC 4 ESC B n1 n2 nk NUL ESC G ESC H Sl DC2 ESC ESCE ESC F ESC Wn SO Expanded Double Wide Print Reset One Line Only Overscoring DC4 ESC n PAGE 117 131 136 136 146 118 124 124 124 125 125 131 132 132 133 137 138 138 139 140 140 144 145 147 123 123 127 127 126 128 128 129 130 130 141 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE Print Attributes Continued Superscript Subscript Printing ESCS n 144 Superscript Subscript Printing ResetESC T 145 Underline ESC n 146 Graphics Bit Image Mode Single Density ESCK n1 n2 119 Bit Image Mode Double Density ESC L n1 n2 120 Bit Image Mode Double Density Double Speed ESC Y n1 n2 121 Bit Image Mode Quadruple DensityESC Z n1 n2 122 Other Functions Bell BEL 119 Characters 80 9F ESC 7 126 Control Codes Characters 80 9F ESC 6 126 Printable Symbols Deselect Printer ESC Q 22 128 Initialize Parameters ESC K n1 NUL n2 n3 n4 n5 134 Print Control Codes ESCVn1 n2 141 Print One Control Code ESC n 141 Select Attributes ESC n1 NUL NUL NUL n2 n3 142 Select Font Print Mode ESC In 143 Super Set Commands ESC 145 Unidirectional Printing ESC Un 146 Backspace ASCII Code BS Hex Code 08 Dec Code 8 Purpose Moves the logical print head to the left one character space toward the first character column
22. 301 Serial Matrix 83 Bold Print Cancel Proprinter XL 123 Bold Print Reset P Series 31 Bold Print Set Proprinter XL 123 Bottom Margin Cancel Proprinter XL 124 Bottom Margin Set Proprinter XL 124 Calibrate Super Set Commands 209 Cancel Proprinter XL 124 Serial Matrix 84 Cancel Line Epson 160 Carriage Return 160 Epson 160 P Series 32 P Series XQ 66 Serial Matrix 85 Carriage Return Set Proprinter XL 125 Channel Assignment EVFU 273 Character Pitch Selection P Series 52 Character Pitch 10 cpi Epson 161 Serial Matrix 85 Character Pitch 12 cpi Epson 161 Proprinter XL 126 Serial Matrix 86 Character Pitch 15 cpi Epson 161 Character Set Select P Series 33 Serial Matrix 86 302 Character Set Select Control Codes Proprinter XL 126 P Series 35 Serial Matrix 88 Character Set Select Printable Symbols Proprinter XL 126 P Series 35 Serial Matrix 89 Character Set Selection Super Set Commands 198 Character Sets Epson 162 International P Series 37 Serial Matrix 90 Character Spacing n 240 Super Set Commands 201 Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0 Epson 163 Clearing EVFU Memory 276 Clip Page Super Set Commands 209 Codabar 223 Code 128 229 Code 39 225 character set 226 Code 93 227 Command Lines 27 Commands CONFIG 283 FILE IO 283 PTR SETUP 283 Compressed Print P Series XQ 67 Condensed Print Epson 163 Proprinter XL 127 Serial Ma
23. Control Code Index Control Code Index This index lists each printer command by function ASCII mnemonic and the page where the command is explained in detail The rest of this chapter defines the control code functions for Serial Matrix Emulation mode The commands are listed in alphabetical order FUNCTION Paper Motion Form Feed Line Feed Line Feed n 216 Inch 1 line only Vertical Tab Page Format Backspace Cancel Carriage Return Delete Forms Length Set Inches Forms Length Set Lines Form Margins Set Horizontal Tab Horizontal Tab Set Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi Line Spacing 7 72 Inch Line Spacing n 72 Inch as executed by ESC 2 Line Spacing n 216 Inch Skip Over Perforation Skip Over Perforation Cancel Vertical Tab Set Clear Print Attributes Bold Print Bold Print Reset Character Pitch 10 cpi Character Pitch 12 cpi Condensed Print Condensed Print Reset ASCII CODE FF LF ESC Jn VT BS CAN CR DEL ESC C NUL n ESC Cn ESC v HT ESC D n7 nk NUL ESC 2 ESC 0 ESC 1 ESC An ESC ESCNn ESC O ESC B n1 n2 n3 nk NUL ESC G ESC H ESCP ESCM SI ESC SI DC2 ESC Elongated Double High Print 1 line ESC h Elongated Double High Print Set Reset Emphasized Print Emphasized Print Reset Expanded Double Wide Print Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only ESC wn ESCE ESC F ESC Wn SO ESC SO
24. PAGE 79 97 100 100 110 Chapter 4 Configuring t he Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE Print Attributes Continued Overscoring ESC n 103 Print Mode Pitch Selection ESC X mn 104 ESC nq Superscript Subscript Printing ESCS n 108 Superscript Subscript Printing Reset ESC T 108 Underline ESC n 109 Graphics Bit Image Mode Single Density ESCK n1 n2 81 Bit Image Mode Double Density ESC L n1 n2 82 Bit Image Mode Double Density Double Speed ESC Y n1 n2 82 Bit Image Mode Quadruple Density ESC Z n1 n2 83 Other Functions Bell BEL 81 Character Set Select ESC xyz 86 Characters 80 9F Control Codes ESC 7 88 Characters 80 9F Printable Symbols ESC 6 89 Characters 80 9F Printable Symbols ESC u 89 Character Set Select International Languages ESC Rona 90 Emulation Reset ESC 94 Extended Character Set ESC 4 96 Extended Character Set Cancel ESC 5 96 Printer Select DC1 107 Printer Deselect DC3 107 Super Set Commands ESC 109 Backspace ASCII Code BS Hex Code 08 Dec Code 8 Purpose Moves the logical print head to the left one character space toward the first character column Comment Moves the character position indicator one character space to the left at the current character pitch setting The code is ignored if the logical print head is positioned at the first character column Example If you were to print five characters then two BS commands then two characters t
25. Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Code Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning Both start and stop codes contain bars and spaces They are automatically produced Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent each numeric character The structure is four wide elements bars or spaces and four narrow elements Each character contains four data bits with each 0 bit made up of a narrow bar wide space arrangement and each 1 bit made up of a wide bar narrow space arrangement Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit If specified the modulo 10 or modulo 11 or both check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning 241 Chapter 7 Codes PDF 417 The PDF417 structure is shown in Figure 18 and described below SR SC M 4 POSITION UPPER GUARD BAND THREE QUIET START DATA FIELD QUIET i ZONE ZONE f NS PECES LOWER GUARD BAND c
26. s the product manufacturer s number number number use 0 through 2 only 2 Manufacturer s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000 00999 X X 3 0 0 EN 3 X X 9 0 0 first three digits of last two digits of depends on how manufacturer s the product many digits number number use 00 appear in the 99 only manufacturer s number 3 Manufacturer s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000 00999 X X X X 0 Pus 4 first four digits of last digit of depends on how manufacturer s product number many digits number use 0 through 9 appear in the only manufacturer s number 4 Manufacturer s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000 00999 X X X X X _ all five digits of last digit of manufacturer s product number number use 5 9 only 253 Bar Codes Chapter 7 Table 75 Six Digit Zero Expansion If the 6 digit number ends with then the MFPS Number is and the Product Number is 1 0 Example 124560 the first 2 digits of the zero suppressed number plus 000 00 plus the THIRD FOURTH and FIFTH digit of the zero 12000 suppressed number 00456 2 1 Example 275831 the first two digits plus 100 27100 same as above 00583 3 2 Example 412022 the first two digits plus 200 41200 same as above 00202 4 3 Example 876543 the first three digits plus 00 87600 000 plus the FOURTH and FIFTH digit 00054 5
27. wide from SO and ESC SO and unidirectional printing from ESC Graphics Standard Density ASCII Code ESC n1 n2 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where 1B 4B n1 n2 27 75 2 Selects normal density bit image graphics of 60 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically n1 256n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment Example DATA consist of 8 bit dot columns with the MSB at the top and 1 bits producing dots For more information refer to Chapter 8 Graphics You can change graphics density with the ESC command The following example produces a pattern of standard density bit image graphics The 9 data bit pattern is repeated 27 times Compare this example to the double density and quadruple density examples SINGLE DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS PSESQSPSNIRISSESMSNINISCSSININISISNINISNSESISSSSESININISIS 171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Graphics Double Density ASCII Code ESC L n1 n2 Hex Code 1B4C n1 2 Dec Code 27 76 n2 Purpose Selects double density bit image graphics of 120 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically where n1 256n2 defines the
28. 6 36 7 37 8 38 0 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 31 12 12 12 12 12 2 32 13 13 13 13 13 3 33 15 15 15 15 15 4 34 17 17 17 17 17 5 35 20 17 20 20 20 The hex values shown i e 0 and 30 are equal Either value can be used in your program expression The value of m is represented by the font choice line NOTE When using the Multinational character set in OCR A or OCR B print mode a unique character set is used Example The sample printout below shows a number of different print modes and pitch selections PRINT MODE AND OR PITCH SELECTION ESC X MN SELECTS THE PRINT MODE LETTER GOTHIC COURIER OR OCR AND CHARACTER PITCH IN CHARACTERS PER INCH CPI PRINTING IN LETTER GOTHIC CDP FONTS PRINTED IN DP 10 CPI PRINTED IN DP 12 CPI PRINTED IN DP 13 CPI PRINTED IN DP 15 CPI 54 Superscript Subscript Printing Superscript Subscript Printing ASCII Code SFCC S Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example SFCC 53 SFCC 83 n Selects superscript or subscript printing n 0 to enable superscript printing hex 00 or hex 30 n 1 to enable subscript printing hex 01 or hex 31 Superscript Subscript font prints at one half the normal vertical character height and at twice the normal vertical density When the superscript subscript control code is received all characters are superscript or subsc
29. Bottom of Line Enable Disable 06 0 inches 152 4 mm 36 lines 08 5 inches 216 0 mm 85 characters 61 Chapter 3 Configuring the XQ Emulation with Control Codes Configuring the XQ Emulation with Control Codes IMPORTANT 62 The remainder of this chapter describes the P Series XQ printer control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer in order to configure and invoke numerous printer functions Format for Control Code Descriptions The following information is listed for each code function where applicable and possible Name The title or function of the command ASCII Code The standard ASCII name for the control code Hex Code code s numeric equivalent in hexadecimal Dec Code The code s numeric equivalent in decimal Purpose The function s of the control code Discussion A description of exceptions or limitations to normal use Example sample is provided for some control codes when it is possible to illustrate the effect of a control code or if a specific syntax is required to complete the program statement i e Horizontal Tab set Vertical Tab set clear If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that are defined in the control code description unpredictable results may occur Edit Mode Edit Mode Any printable character in the data stream can replace printable characters or spaces already loaded in the print buf
30. command The maximum forms length is 24 inches All other values are ignored When forms length is set by the ESC C NUL sequence the skip over perforation is set to zero Forms length can also be set through the control panel The control code forms length setting from the host computer overrides the control panel setting 97 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Forms Length Set Lines ASCII Code ESC C n Hex Code 1 43 Dec Code 27 67 Purpose Sets the length of a form paper in lines where 1 through 192 hex 01 through CO to specify the number of lines per page at the current line spacing Comment The forms length set becomes the current forms length The forms length units are always defined in inches therefore subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command Changing does not change the forms length The forms length is set to the number of lines defined by the quotient of n and the current line spacing so that the units are in inches If the calculated forms length in lines is not an exact multiple of the target machine dot size the forms length value is adjusted down to the next possible multiple When forms length is set by the ESC C sequence the skip over perforation is set to zero Form Margins Set ASCII Code ESC v n1 n2 n3 n4 Hex Code 1B 76 n1 2 4 Dec Code 27 118 n1 n2 n3 n4 Purpose Selects left n1 ri
31. greater than its height The top edge of the image is the left edge of the paper The left edge of the image is the leading edge of the paper Figure 2 is an example of landscape orientation The top edge of the image is along the left edge Leading gt of the paper Edge 8 5 Inches lt 11 Inches gt Figure 2 Landscape Orientation 208 Print Engine Options Print Engine Options The following commands enable the user to select print engine options through host software command NOTE Not all options may be available with your printer Consult the User s Guide for your printer to determine which options are available If an option is not available the emulation ignores the corresponding command Calibrate ASCII Code SSCC D Hex Code SSCC 44 Dec Code SSCC 68 Purpose Calibrate the media sensor Clip Page ASCII Code SSCC b n Hex Code SSCC62n Dec Code SSCC 98 Purpose Enables or disables clipping the page at the end of a label Only valid if the media sensor is set to reflective or transmissive Table 51 Clip Page n Value ASCII Meaning 0 Clip page disabled 1 Clip page enabled Error Recover ASCII Code SSCC z n Hex Code SSCC 7 Dec Code SSCC 122n Table 52 Error Recover n Value ASCII Meaning 1 If an error occurs while printing a page the printer makes an attempt to reprint that page 0 No attempt is made to reprint a page in t
32. selects the Primary Character Set This code is used in 7 bit systems as if data bit 8 was set to O If data bit 8 is disabled this control code selects the range as if data bit 8 is set to 0 and data is printed as characters from hex 20 through hex 7F See the Extended Character Set example Form Feed Form Feed ASCII Code FF Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 0C 12 Prints the data in the buffer advances the paper position to the next top of form and moves the character position to the first character column The default forms length is determined by the configuration in nonvolatile memory Forms length is set by using the control panel or forms length control codes Code FF cancels all single line only print attributes The Form Feed command reacts differently when the VFU is active See Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting Forms Length Set Inches ASCII Code ESC C NUL n Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment 1B 4300 n 27670n Sets the length of forms paper in inches n whole numbers from 1 through 24 hex 01 through hex 18 to specify the number of inches on a page Upon receipt of this code the current line becomes the first line of the form and the form length set becomes the current forms length Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of the form are ignored Forms length is defined in inches therefore subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this
33. 0 8 at the time of printing PDF417 can also recover from omissions and misdecodes of code words Since it requires two code words to recover from a misdecode one to detect 242 PostBar and Royal Mail the error and one to correct for it a given security level can support half the number of misdecodes that it can of undecoded words PDF Print Data Field is not offered due to the large amount of data that can be encoded PostBar and Royal Mail PostBar and Royal Mail bar codes like POSTNET are used for mailing applications However these bar codes can encode full addresses on labels These bar codes are similar to POSTNET in terms of bar space and width but have four different types of bars Full Height Ascender Descender and Tracker whereas POSTNET only has two bar types Tall and Short The Royal Mail symbology converts alphanumeric characters into patterns of four bars using combinations of Full Height Ascender Descender and Trackers It also adds start and stop bar codes as well as a check digit PostBar allows you complete flexibility to specify the individual bar types that comprise the signal For PostBar you are responsible for encoding the address adding the start and stop codes and supplying the appropriate check digit Quiet Zone The bar code structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which is a 2mm border on each side of the bar code Start Stop Code The start and stop bars identify t
34. 08 OE Dec Code 8 14 NOTE Configure this feature from the control panel Purpose Selects elongated double high character printing for one line Comment The Elongated Character control code can be placed anywhere in the data line before the line terminator Following the line terminator the printer automatically selects the default print mode Consequently the Elongated Character control code must be sent for each line of elongated characters Elongated characters cannot be mixed with standard characters on the same print line The current line spacing is doubled for one line This code can occur anywhere in the datastream and is acted upon immediately It is cancelled by an SI code or a paper motion command Example CONTROL CODE 08 HEX SELECTS ELONGATED CHARACTER PRINTING FOR ONE LINE AND THEN THE DEFAULT PRINT MODE IS RESELECTED AUTOMATICALLY Form Feed ASCII Code FF Hex Code 0C Dec Code 12 Purpose Prints the data in the buffer advances the paper position to the next top of form and moves the logical printhead to the first character column Comment The default forms length is determined by the configuration in nonvolatile memory Forms length is set by using the control panel or VFU Code FF cancels all single line only print attributes The Form Feed command reacts differently when the VFU is active See Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting 69 Chapter 3 Configuring the XQ Emulation with Contr
35. 169 Form Feed FF 171 Graphics Double Density Double Speed ESC Y 173 Double Density ESC L 172 Quadruple Density ESC Z 174 Standard Density ESC K 171 Half Speed Mode On Off ESC s 174 Horizontal Tab Execute HT 175 Horizontal Tab Set Release ESC D 175 Initialize Printer ESC 176 Italic Printing Cancel ESC 5 176 Italic Printing ESC 4 176 Line Feed n 216 Inch ESC J 177 Line Feed LF 177 Line Spacing n 216 Inch ESC 3 180 Line Spacing n 72 Inch ESC A 179 Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi ESC 2 178 Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi ESC 0 178 Line Spacing 7 72 Inch ESC 1 179 Make 80 9F Hex Control Codes ESC 7 180 Make 80 9F Hex Printable ESC 6 180 Master Print Select ESC 182 Paper Out Detection Disable ESC 8 183 Paper Out Detection Enable ESC 9 182 Pass Bit 7 from Host ESC 183 Printer Deselect DC3 183 Printer Select DC1 184 Proportional Spacing Select Deselect ESC p 187 Reassign Graphics Mode ESC 184 Remove Downloaded Characters 184 Select Graphics Mode ESC 185 Select Italic Character Set ESC t 186 Select Print Quality ESC x 186 Select Serif or Sans Serif Font ESC k 187 Select User Defined Font ESC 187 Select Vertical Tab Channel ESC 187 Select 9 Pin Graphics Mode ESC 186 Select Deselect Proportional Spacing ESC p 187 Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position in 1 60 Inch ESC 188 Set Bit 7
36. 42 Table of Contents FormiF eed iate ie e RA Le a ee ERE 43 Forms Length Set Inches 43 Forms Length Set Lines 44 Form Margins A Mee Pia dat 44 Line Feed 4 5 e hc dtt eno tet 45 Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 1 1 46 Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 pi 47 Line Spacing 8 or 10 3 Ipi One Line Only 47 Line Spacing 7 72 Inch ssssssssssssseeeen nn 48 Line Spacing M72 NCN 49 Line Spacing n 216 Inch ssssssssssseeeeee 50 OVERS COMING 0 533 Isid tiet ee aa ais 50 Plot Even Dot P Series High Density Graphics 51 Plot Odd Dot P Series Normal Density Graphics 51 Print Mode Pitch Selection eseseeeeee 52 Superscript Subscript Printing sssesseeeee 55 Superscript Subscript Printing Reset 55 Super Set Commands sse 56 Underline nne eade cce ete 56 VFU Commands P Series sse 57 Vertical Tab ote etes 57 P Series XQ Printer Protocol 59 59 P Series XQ Default Values and 60 Configuring the XQ Emulation with Control 62 Format for Control Code
37. A page 49 If no distance has been set by SFCC A the distance is 1 6 inch The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting Example The following example illustrates 1 6 inch line spacing and assumes that a distance has not been set by SFCC A SET LINE SPACING AT 1 6 INCH ESC 2 SETS LINE SPACING TO 6 LPI OR AS SET BY ESC A CONTROL CODE ESC 2 SETS LINE SPACING AT 6 LPI FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED 46 Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi ASCII Code SFCC 0 SFCCLPI n Hex Code SFCC 30 Dec Code SFCC 48 Purpose Specifies continuous line spacing at 1 8 inch increments 8 Comment When the 1 8 inch line spacing control code is received all lines are printed at 8 until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting For SFCC LPI n the value of n can be 6 or 8 only If n 8 this command sets line spacing to 1 8 inch Values of n other than 6 or 8 causes an error message Command Line Error Messages are listed in Table 2 on page 27 Example The following example illustrates 1 8 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE AM SETS ETRE ene NG 1 NCH 8 LPT FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED Line Spacing 8 or 10 3 One Line Only ASCII Code ACK SFCC f Hex Code 0
38. Cmd CFG Ld Form Length Form Length Form Length Form Width Form Width Form Width Enable 4 Enable Control Code Even dot plot Normal Enable Bottom of Line Enable Disable 06 0 inches 152 4 mm 36 lines 08 5 inches 216 0 mm 85 characters Advanced User must be enabled under the Printer Control Menu in order for the Advanced User parameters to be visible and changeable 25 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes IMPORTANT 26 The remainder of this chapter describes the P Series printer control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer in order to invoke and configure numerous P Series emulation functions Format for Control Code Descriptions The following information is listed for each code function where applicable Name The title or function of the command ASCII Code The ASCII mnemonic for the command is shown Command sequences are in 7 bit ASCII form Code code or command sequence in hexadecimal numbers Dec Code The code or command sequence in decimal numbers Purpose function s of the control code Comment discussion of the uses of the code or command sequence including exceptions or limitations to its use Example sample is provided for some control codes when it is possible to illustrate the effect of a control code or if a spe
39. Comment When the ESC A control sequence is received all line feed commands following an ESC 2 sequence are at n 72 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting Small values of n may result in overlapping lines Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript characters are used on the same line Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap Example The following example illustrates 20 72 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC A 20 SETS LINE SPACING AT 20 72 INCH INCREMENTS FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED 102 Line Spacing n 216 Inch Line Spacing n 216 Inch ASCII Code ESC 3 n Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example 1 3 27 51 Specifies the line spacing at n 216 inch increments 1 through 255 When the n 216 inch line spacing control code is received all line feeds following are at n 216 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing the remainder is added
40. Configuration parameters defined by command bytes n4 and n5 if present will override conflicting factory default values n3 Parameter n3 is provided for compatibility with the Proprinter III XL printer control language standard You may define any value for this parameter For Proprinters this bit must define the attached printer as either Proprinter value 03 or Proprinter III XL value 22 hex 16 134 Initialize Parameters n4 and n5 Parameter bytes n4 and n5 allow you to define several configuration parameters that will override conflicting factory default and memory based configuration values when the printer is reinitialized Possible values for n4 and n5 are listed in Table 28 and Table 29 respectively NOTE In addition to the formatting from bytes n4 and n5 this command sets the current line as top of form It also clears vertical tabs and sets the horizontal tabs at every eight columns starting at column 9 Table 28 n4 Values n4 Bit Function OFF 0 ON 1 7 Process this byte Process Ignore 6 Reserved Reserved Reserved 5 n a n a n a 4 Line Feed LF LF CR add CR with each LF 3 Carriage Return CR CR LF add LF with each CR 2 Set forms length 11 inches 12 inches 1 Slashed Zero Disable Enable 0 Character set 1 2 Table 29 n5 Values n5 Bit Function OFF 0 ON 1 7 Process this byte Process Ignore 6 Code page 437 850 5 Unidirectional Bidirecti
41. Control Codes Line Spacing n 216 Inch ASCII Code ESC 3 n Hex Code 1B33n Dec Code 2751n Purpose Specifies the line spacing at n 216 inch increments where n 0 through 255 Comment All line feeds following receipt of this code are at n 216 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset Line spacing set by this control code overrides line spacing setting set at the operator panel The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing the remainder is added to the next paper motion command Paper movement occurs in multiples of 3 216 only Use caution when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript overlapping lines may occur Example The following example illustrates n 216 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC 3 50 SETS LINE SPACING AT 50 216 INCH INCREMENTS FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED Make Hex 80 9F Control Codes ASCII Code ESC 7 Hex Code 1B37 Dec Code 2755 Purpose Selects hex 80 9F in the character sets as control codes Comment This is the default when the Epson character set is selected as the default set at the operator panel Make Hex 80 9F Printable ASCII Code ESC 6 Hex Code 1B 36 Dec Code 2754 Purpose Selects hex 80 9F in the character se
42. Courier 93950 Letter Gothic 93777 OCR A 90993 OCR B 91409 and CG Times 92500 Parameter n2 is a 1 digit bold flag 2 0 disable bold 1 enable bold Parameter n3 selects a 1 digit slant flag Slant is similar to italic but also offers a backward slant n3 0 disable slant 1 right slant 2 left slant 201 Chapter 7 Super Set Commands Parameter n4 selects a 3 digit symbol set Table 47 n4 Value Symbol Sets Printer Protocol n4 Symbol Set Proprinter XL 000 Code Page 437 001 Code Page 850 All others 000 IBM PC 001 Multinational 002 ECMA 94 Latin 1 003 DEC Multinational 004 OCR A 005 OCR B Parameter n5 selects a 4 digit point size 1 4 point resolution The horizontal pitch cpi is automatically adjusted based on the point size selected Examples The following command selects the Courier typeface a fixed pitch font It also sets the point size to 12 which corresponds to 6 Ipi and 10 cpi SSCC F 93952 0048 The following command enables the left slant attribute and sets the point size to 100 SSCC F 2 0400 The following command selects the Futura typeface which is proportional font It also enables the bold print attribute and disables the slant attribute SSCC F 91810 1 0 xxx xxxx Font Size ASCII Code SSCC S nf n2 n3 n4 n5 n6 Hex Code SSCC 53 n1 n23B n3 n4 3B n5 3B n6 Dec Co
43. ENQ Underline Page Format Carriage Return CR Channels 1 through 14 DLE through US See NOTE below Delete DEL Line Spacing 8 or 10 3 Ipi ACK Space SP NOTE Channel codes hex 10 through 1F are used when the PI line is PAGE 69 70 74 71 72 73 66 68 68 70 73 disabled For the applicable PI enable channel codes see Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting Other Functions Alternate Character Set Deselect Shift In SI Alternate Character Set Select Shift Out SO BS See NOTE below Compressed Print SOH ETX HT See NOTE below Elongated Characters BS SO See NOTE below Select Letter Gothic DP STX ETX HT 65 65 67 69 72 NOTE A code can be assigned by changing the configuration at the control panel For further details refer to your User s Guide 64 Alternate Character Set Deselect Shift In Alternate Character Set Deselect Shift In ASCII Code SI Hex Code Dec Code 15 Purpose This code selects the primary character set Comment The alternate character set select and deselect codes can be used to mix primary and alternate characters on a single line The main character set is also automatically selected when a line terminator code is received Example THE ALTERNATE CHARACTER SET SELECT CODE OE HEX Et Ey St PRIMARY CHARACTER SET IS RESELECTED Altern
44. EXAMPLE THIS SHOULD BE 12 CPI ITALIC DOUBLE WIDE UNDERLINED PRINT Paper Out Detection Enable ASCII Code ESC 9 Hex Code 1B 39 Dec Code 2757 Purpose Asserts a paper out condition immediately when the end of the paper supply is sensed TComment The printer decodes and ignores this command Paper Out Detection Disable Paper Out Detection Disable ASCII Code ESC 8 Hex Code 1B 38 Dec Code 2756 Purpose X Enable printing to the end of the paper supply when a paper out condition is sensed TComment The printer decodes and ignores this command Pass Bit 7 from Host ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B 23 Dec Code 2735 Purpose Passes bit 7 the eighth and most significant bit whether it is 1 or 0 thereby cancelling ESC gt and ESC Comment This command affects only text and control code data bit 8 of graphics data is always passed through Printer Deselect ASCII Code DC3 Hex Code 13 Dec Code 19 Purpose Places printer in the deselected state Comment The configuration parameter Printer Select must be set to Enable Refer to the User s Guide for information about this menu option When the printer receives this command it ignores data until a DC1 Printer Select command is received 183 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Printer Select ASCII Code DC1 Hex Code 11 Dec Code 17 Purpose Places printer in the selected state Comment The co
45. PTR SETUP processing The offending command will be the first line of printed text Although the original implementation of PTR SETUP allowed for only a single parameter separated from the sub command by a single semicolon character the new PTR SETUP command set allows for multiple parameters separated by commas semicolons spaces or tabs 283 Appendix B The PTR SETUP Commands Commands Each emulation has modes in which the PTR SETUP commands could get missed For this reason it is highly recommended that all PTR SETUP commands be placed between print jobs rather than attempting to imbed them within jobs PTR SETUP commands have the following format SFCC PTR SETUP Command Sub Command Value PTR END For example if the SFCC assigned to the emulation you are using is the caret hex 5E and you wanted to load configuration number 4 and capture all incoming data to a file named BIN you would use the following command PTR SETUP CONFIG LOAD 4 FILE IO CAPTURE BIN PTR END Table 80 lists all the command sub command and parameter combinations and gives a brief description of the command NOTE When a file system error occurs a message will be displayed on the front panel indicating the error and the action needed to take to correct the error Table 80 PTR SETUP Commands Command Sub Command Parameter Description CONFIG LOAD Cig Cfg can be 0 8 The PTR_SETUP will load configuration Cf
46. Plot control code to produce the image The image is printed 25 times as shown in Figure 35 An entire dot row is plotted in one printing pass Consequently the first row of all 25 images is printed in one pass followed by the second row etc until all rows have been printed 10 LPRINT Odd Dot Plot 20 FOR I 1 TO 8 30 READ R1 40 READ R2 50 LPRINT CHR 5 60 FOR N 1 TO 25 70 LPRINT R1 CHR R2 80 EXT N 90 LPRINT 100 I 110 DATA 42 64 73 65 92 64 42 64 73 65 92 64 42 64 73 65 120 LPRINT Odd Dot Plot Figure 35 Sample Odd Dot Plot To Exit the P Series Plot Mode To Exit the P Series Plot Mode When returning to the print mode from the P Series Plot Mode an extra line feed should be included in the data stream to maintain proper print line registration relative to the last line of plot graphics If the extra line feed is not included the first character line after the graphics data may be truncated as shown in Figure 36 E plot data NH E plot data E ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR A text line follows plot data A text line follows plot data but is preceded by a single line preceded by an additional line terminator code Text characters terminator or LF code Characters may extend into the range of the are printed at full height previously printed plot line and appear truncated Figure 36 Truncated Character Line Combining Graphics and Text The ASC
47. The lower guard band is provided when the readable data field is selected Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit provides the means to verify accurate scanning 255 Chapter 7 256 Bar Codes UPS 11 The UPS 11 structure is shown in Figure 25 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION 9 ie BE 1 T 1 UPPER GUARD BAND 1 puer saa I QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET Llc E l 1 LOWER GUARD BAND L J OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 25 UPS 11 Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code Each of the UPS 11 subsets uses a unique start code and a common stop code both automatically provided Data Field UPS 11 is a special case of Code 128 page 237 This bar code is restricted to 10 data characters The first character must be 0 through 9 or A through Z The remaining nine digits must be 0 through 9 Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code dat
48. VT CR etc by the DC4 double wide cancel code ESC Emulation Reset CAN or ESC W double wide print When set by SO double wide print is not cancelled by the Autowrap feature Example following sample illustrates Expanded Print for one line only Another example of expanded printing is shown in the Expanded Double Wide Print description above CONTROL CODE SO SELECTS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING FOR ONE LINE ONLY 95 Chapter 4 96 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Extended Character Set ASCII Code ESC 4 Hex Code 1B34 Dec Code 2752 Purpose the extended character set in the range hex 0 through FF using codes hex 20 through hex 7F Comment This code is used in 7 bit systems as if data bit 8 was set to 1 For example sending code hex 20 accesses the symbol at code point hex If a printable symbol is not available at the code point a space is printed ESC 4 is not cancelled by the next paper motion command Example The following sample illustrates Extended Character Set CONTROL CODE ESC 4 SELECTS THE EXTENDED CHARACTER SET AND ESC 5 SELECTS THE PRIMARY CHARACTER SET AHICH IS DISPLAYED BENEATH THE EXTENDED CHARACTER SET ABCDEFGH Extended Character Set Cancel Primary Character Set Select ASCII Code ESC 5 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example 1B 35 27 53 Cancels Extended Character Set as selected by ESC 4 and
49. and to be used for user defined characters n 0 returns hex 00 1F and 80 9F to control codes The printable characters that are included in hex codes 00 through 1F and 80 through 9F are usually not printable in the default state on Epson printers Sending ESC 1 enables you to print characters in this range Sending ESC I 0 returns the codes to non printable status The printable codes for the Epson character set are shown in Table 39 The mapping of 00 through 1F and 80 through 9F are the same in this case Table 39 shows the types of characters and their addresses it is not a sample of printer output 169 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Table 39 Epson Printable Codes Hex 00 1F and 80 9F B7 BITS P5 B4 B3 B2 B1 OCTAL DECIMAL HEX 010 1 5 DD ED ED BEL BS HT c ov wjr jooo o i1 o o 2 s x o o o o gt N C Co C DC4 gt 2 Epson USA Character Set 170 IBM 437 Code Page Form Feed Form Feed ASCII Code FF Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 0C 12 Prints the data in the buffer if any then moves the paper to the top of the next form The logical print head moves to the left margin This code cancels all one line only emphasis and font controls double
50. control code is a line by line print attribute when the control code is received one entire line of elongated characters is printed and then automatically reset When using this feature with relative line slewing the paper position is moved n 1 lines rather than n lines See Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting for more information on relative line slewing When using small line spacing and the lines overlap an unexpected print format may result Example following sample illustrates elongated character printing CONTROL CODE ESC h SELECTS ELONGATED CHARACTER PRINTING FOR ONE LINE ONLY 92 Elongated Double High Print Set Reset Elongated Double High Print Set Reset ASCII Code ESC wn Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment 1B77n 27119n Turns double high character printing on and off Double high characters are standard width but twice as high hex 1 or hex 31 turns double high printing on hex 0 or hex 30 turns double high printing off The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in double high NOTE It is recommended to use double Line Feeds and Carriage Returns when double high character printing is on after an ESC w control code has been sent or else the printer overstrikes text that has already printed If Superscript Subscript ESC S or Condensed Print 51 is combined with Double High printing only Double High printing occurs Example The following sample il
51. cse 3 Figure 18 PDF417 Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code Data Field PDF417 provides twelve modes to encode data The first three are pre established the remaining nine are user modes which can be defined by users or industry associations according to specific applications 1 Extended Alphanumeric Compaction mode EXC Comprised of four sub modes this mode offers encodation of all printable ASCII characters This is the default mode ASCII Emulation uses shift or latch characters to enable other modes 2 Binary ASCII Plus mode This offers encodation for all ASCII characters printable or not and binary values 3 Numeric Compaction mode This offers encodation for numeric values to a density of almost 3 digits per code word ASCII Emulation will automatically switch between modes to provide the smallest encodation for the data Security Level PDF417 can detect and correct errors Each label has 2 code words of error detection You can select the error correction capacity based on application needs Specify a security level in the range of
52. descriptive name or brand name that identifies a particular design of type See font proportional W Weight See character weight Write To store data to memory or mass storage hard disk floppy diskette RAM etc 299 Appendix D 300 A Alternate Character Sets P Series XQ 65 Application identifiers UCC EAN 128 247 ASCII Character Set 281 Attribute Set and Reset Codes Proprinter XL 116 P Series 27 Serial Matrix 78 Attributes Proprinter XL 142 Australian 4 State 222 B Backspace Epson 159 Proprinter XL 118 P Series 30 Serial Matrix 80 Bar code Australian 4 State 222 Codabar 223 Code 128 229 Code 39 225 Code 93 227 EAN 13 235 EAN 8 234 FIM 236 Interleaved 2 5 238 Maxicode 239 MSI 241 overview 217 PDF 417 242 Index Postbar 243 POSTNET 244 Royal Mail 243 syntax 218 Telepen 245 UCC EAN 128 246 UPC Shipping 255 UPC A 251 UPC E 252 UPS 11 256 Bell Epson 160 P Series 30 Binary Data Byte Sample 258 Bit Image Density 261 Bit Image Graphics 258 Bit Image Mode Double Density Proprinter XL 120 Serial Matrix 82 Bit Image Mode Double Density Double Speed Proprinter XL 121 Serial Matrix 82 Bit Image Mode Quadruple Density Proprinter XL 122 Serial Matrix 83 Bit Image Mode Single Density Proprinter XL 119 Serial Matrix 81 Bit Image Pattern Decimal Values 260 Plan Sample 260 Bit Image Programming Format 262 Bold Print P Series 31
53. form for the quiet zones The number system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone Start Stop Codes The start stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of the bar code These codes are automatically provided Number System Character The number system character field for all UPC E bar codes must be zero Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent a limited character set numbers 0 9 and Special Characters Start and Stop The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven modules For UPC E eleven digits are expected which are compressed down to the six encoded symbol characters UPC E Readable Data The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The number system character is included in the check digit algorithm Table 74 Eleven Digit Compression 1 Manufacturers Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000 00999 X X 0 0 0 X X 1 0 0 first two digits of last three digits of third digit of the X X 2 0 0 manufacturer
54. generate the correct start code based on the first four data field characters 249 Chapter 7 250 Bar Codes Data Field UCC EAN 128 bar codes require a special character called Function 1 FNC1 to immediately follow the start code ASCII Emulation automatically supplies this character so it must not be included in the data field by the user A character is made up of three bars and three spaces each varying in width from 1 through 4 modules for a total of eleven modules The number of modules making up the bars is even The stop code has four bars and is 13 modules wide The character set for UCC EAN 128 is the same as the character set for Code 128 See the Code 128 Character Set Table 68 on page 231 Every character is interpreted according to the currently active character subset UCC EAN 128 uses subset B and subset C only Subset B shown in Table 69 on page 232 includes all standard alphanumeric keyboard characters lowercase alphabetical characters and special characters Subset C interprets the characters as pairs of numbers 00 through 99 along with some special characters as shown in Table 70 on page 233 The start code or subset switch code determines whether a particular bar code character is decoded as one character or as a pair of numbers Readable Data The optional printed data field PDF provides a human readable interpretation of the bar code data When the printed data field is enabled by use of the P
55. high density The densities can be mixed within the printed page on a dot row by row basis but the two densities cannot be mixed on the same dot row Normal density plotting is selected with the odd dot plot control code ENQ hex 05 The odd numbered dot columns are addressed to produce a vertical density that varies based on the font selected 72 dpi vertical for Letter Gothic DP and 144 dpi vertical for Courier NLQ Figure 31 illustrates normal density dot plot Figure 31 Normal Density Plot Plot Data Byte Format High density plotting is selected with the even dot plot control code EOT hex 04 in conjunction with the odd dot plot control code ENQ hex 05 The odd and even numbered dot columns are addressed to double the horizontal density The vertical density remains the same in normal and high density plotting though vertical density is based on the current print mode Figure 32 illustrates high density plotting Figure 32 High Density Plot Plot Data Byte Format In P Series Plot Mode the format is as follows e Each data byte specifies six out of twelve plot dot columns e Using odd dot plot mode bits 1 through 6 of the data byte address the odd numbered dot columns using even dot plot mode bits 1 through 6 of the data byte address the even numbered dot columns e Bit6 and or bit 7 of the data byte must be a 1 or true bit in the Plot mode e Bit 8 of the data byte is not used in
56. interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol 223 Chapter 7 Codes Check Digit The optional modulo 43 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning Table 65 Codabar Character Set Character Hex Character Hex 0 0 24 1 1 3A 2 2 2F 3 3 2E 4 4 2B 5 5 A 41 6 6 B 42 7 7 C 43 8 8 D 44 9 9 2 224 Code 39 Code 39 The Code 39 structure is shown in Figure 14 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT 1 UPPER GUARD BAND 1 piu iu l QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET il d LOWER GUARD BAND l SR SC POSITION e 1 J OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 8 Code 39 Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to repres
57. is restricted to 11 or 13 digits Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning German 1 2 5 bar codes have the check digit inserted automatically 238 Maxicode Maxicode The Maxicode bar code structure is shown in Figure 16 and described below MIT NS ye tet oe A oo 4H ET Figure 16 Sample MAXICODE Bar Code The Maxicode bar code is a fixed size matrix symbology made up of an offset of rows of hexagonal elements arranged around a unique finder pattern Maxicode is suitable for high speed scanning applications and is capable of encoding all of the 256 ASCII characters Readable Data The Maxicode bar code does not support a human readable form Data Field The data field of a Maxicode bar code is divided into a primary message and a secondary message The primary message has a fixed structure while the secondary message has a free format Standard Data Field A standard Maxicode data field has its primary message structured as shown in Table 71 The data following the primary message is the secondary message and has a free format Table 71 Standard Data Fields Character Title Data Positions 0 2 Class of Service Numeric 3 5 Country Code Numeric 6 14 Post
58. note gives you helpful information and tips about printer operation and maintenance Glossary The Glossary defines computer terms and acronyms used in this manual It is located just before the Index Chapter 1 _ Introduction Software Features The ASCII Emulation software provides the following features e Printer Protocols Printronix P Series Printronix P Series XQ Printronix Serial Matrix IBM Proprinter IIl XL Epson FX 1050 e Orientations Portrait Inverted Portrait Landscape Inverted Landscape e Graphics Bit Image Graphics P Series Compatible Plot Mode e Vertical Page Formatting Printronix P Series Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU Serial Matrix Vertical Formatting Unit VFU e Character Sets IBM PC ECMA 94 Latin 1 Multinational DEC Multinational IBM Code Page 437 and 850 as well as the international symbol sets in the following categories Arabic Sets Cyrillic Sets European Sets Greek Sets Hebrew Sets Turkish Sets Font Typefaces Courier Letter Gothic OCR A OCR B CG Triumverate Bold Condensed Ability to download True Type 20 Printer Configuration Print Attributes Emphasized Bold print Scalable font sizes Superscript subscript print Automatic underline and overscore Carriage return editing Variable point size Italics e Barcode Printing NOTE Complete listings of all the choices from these categories are printed in the menu descr
59. of Incoming Data Bytes to 1 ESC 188 Set Forms Length by Lines ESC C 190 Set Forms Length in Inches ESC C 0 190 Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1 120 Inch ESC SP 188 Set Margin Left ESC 1 189 Set Margin Right ESC Q 189 Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in 1 120 Inch ESC gt 191 Set Vertical Tabs in Channels ESC b 191 Skip Over Perforation ESC N 192 Skip Over Perforation Cancel ESC O 192 Superscript and Subscript Printing ESC S 193 Superscript and Subscript Printing Cancel ESC T 193 Underline ESC 194 Unidirectional Printing 1 line ESC 194 Unidirectional Printing Set Reset ESC U 194 Vertical Tab Execute VT 195 Vertical Tab Set Clear ESC B 195 exceptions and differences 152 factory settings 150 print mode support for character sets 156 Set and Reset codes 155 Epson FX 1050 Escape ESC sequences 154 Error Recover Super Set Commands 209 ESC U Unidirectional Printing Proprinter control code 146 Escape ESC sequences Epson FX 1050 154 Even Dot Plot P Series 51 EVFU Channel Assignment 273 Clearing Memory 276 End Load Code 274 Memory Clearing 276 P Series 273 P Series Relative Line Slewing 277 Start Load Code 273 EVFU Electronic Vertical Formatting Unit PI line disabled 276 PI line enabled 275 Expanded Print Proprinter XL 129 P Series 41 Serial Matrix 95 Expanded Print Reset Proprinter XL 130 Expanded Print 1 line Proprinter XL 130 P
60. operating characteristics of the host computer system The point where the data line from the host computer plugs into the printer A set of rules or conventions governing the exchange of information between computer systems For computer printers a protocol is the coding convention used to convey and print data A printer protocol includes character codes printer function codes and machine to machine communication codes R Random Access Memory Also called main memory or working memory this is the active memory of a printer into which programs are loaded RAM is said to be volatile because data in RAM are lost when power is turned off or interrupted Compare with ROM To retrieve data from memory or mass storage hard disk floppy diskette RAM etc To turn off deactivate disable or return to a previous state A measure expressing the number of component units in a given range used to create an image in printing expressed as the number of dots per inch dpi horizontally and vertically Read Only Memory Programs instructions and routines permanently stored in the printer ROM is not lost when power is turned off and cannot be written to hence the name read only ROM resident fonts are permanently stored in a printer and available at any time via software commands Compare with RAM 297 Appendix D 298 Serial communications Set SFCC Shadow printing Slewing SSCC Start bit St
61. operator Setting a new forms length ESC C resets the bottom margin to zero If the distance set is equal or greater than the form length printing is only allowed on the top line of each page This feature is disabled whenever vertical tabs are set Bottom margin can also be selected from the control panel however vertical tabs within the bottom margin zone as set by the control panel are ignored The control code bottom margin setting from the host computer overrides the control panel setting Bottom Margin Cancel ASCII Code ESC O alpha O Hex Code 1B 4F Dec Code 2779 Purpose Resets bottom margin to zero Cancel ASCII Code CAN Hex Code 18 Dec Code 24 Purpose Clears the print buffer of all printable symbols since the last paper motion command was received Comment This control code may be used as a delete line function but should be used with extreme care to avoid possible misprinting This control code cancels the double wide attribute set by SO if active No other print attributes are affected 124 Carriage Return Carriage Return ASCII Code CR Hex Code 00 Dec Code 13 Purpose Returns the logical print head to the first character column resets the pointer to the first character position Comment The CR code may or may not cause printing or paper motion depending on the DEFINE CR CODE configuration parameter value If the DEFINE CR CODE submenu displays Define CR Code CR C
62. or hex 31 Comment When automatic overscore is enabled all characters including Spaces are overscored until disabled Example The following sample illustrates automatic overscoring and overscoring reset CONTROL CODE ESC 1 ENABLES AUTOMATIC OVERSCORING CONTROL CODE ESC O DISABLES AUTOMATIC OVERSCORING 50 Plot Even Dot P Series High Density Graphics Plot Even Dot P Series High Density Graphics ASCII Code EOT SFCC d Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 04 SFCC 64 4 SFCC 100 Prints dots at the even numbered dot columns The even dot plot code is used for programming high density graphics and must be used in conjunction with the Odd Dot Plot code hex 05 See P Series Compatible Plot Mode Odd Even Dot Plotting on page 264 for detailed plot mode information Plot Odd Dot P Series Normal Density Graphics ASCII Code SFCC e Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 05 SFCC 65 5 SFCC 101 Prints dots at the odd numbered dot columns This is the P Series programming normal density graphics control code The ENQ code should occur before any printable data in the data stream For high density graphics the Even Dot Plot code hex 04 must be used in conjunction with and precede the Odd Dot Plot code See P Series Compatible Plot Mode Odd Even Dot Plotting on page 264 for detailed plot mode information 51 Chapter 2 _ Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Print
63. pitch size settings Monospaced fonts are sometimes used when strict character alignment is desired tables charts spreadsheets etc A font printed parallel to the short edge of a page A font in which the width of the character cell varies with the width of the character For example i takes less space to print than Using proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed documents giving text a typeset appearance This manual is printed in proportional fonts See character weight The measurement of the width of a character cell in dots G The shape of a character in a print mode and pitch H The host computer stores processes and sends data to be printed and which communicates directly with the printer The term host indicates the controlling computer since modern printers are themselves microprocessor controlled computer systems ipm Interface International Language Invoke Italic Ipi lpm Memory Nonvolatile memory inches per minute The speed at which graphics are plotted The hardware components used to link two devices by common physical interconnection signal and functional characteristics Character set in which characters have been rearranged according to a substitution table for use in a different country To put into effect or operation A type style in which characters are slanted This sentence is set in italics L lines per inch a m
64. represent the binary code bit pattern Bit Image mode utilizes the 1 or true bits from a binary data byte to print dot patterns These data bytes are actually the binary equivalent of ASCII character decimal values 0 through 255 Figure 26 shows the binary data byte bit pattern for the ASCII character A hex 41 decimal 65 MSB JOIO OJOJOI T Figure 26 Binary Data Byte If this data byte is rotated vertically the result is a vertical data byte pattern with the most significant bit MSB at the top as shown in Figure 27 MSB MS Figure 27 Vertical Data Byte Pattern If each 1 or true bit is plotted the result is a Bit Image plot of the ASCII character A The relationship of ASCII character decimal value and Bit Image plot is shown in Figure 28 258 Plotting a Bit Image Pattern BINARY VERTICALLY ASCII DECIMAL CODE TO ROTATEDDATA BITIMAGE CHARACTER VALUE EQUIVALENT BYTE PATTERN Figure 28 Vertical Data Byte Pattern The byte in the previous example or any other byte can be identified by its binary octal hexadecimal or decimal equivalent and subsequently can be used to generate a Bit Image pattern A table of the standard ASCII character set and equivalences is included in Appendix A Use this table to quickly identify the various equivalences of ASCII characters Bit Image plotting is not limited to printable ASCII characters bit image patterns can be plotted for any 8 bit data byte
65. spacing If a vertical tab format is defined but no vertical tab positions are set between the current print position and the end of the form the paper position is advanced to the top of the next form The VT code resets all single line print attributes More information on vertical tabs is provided in Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting Vertical Tab Set Clear Vertical Tab Set Clear ASCII Code ESC B n1 n2 n3 nk NUL Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example CONTROL CODE 1B 42 n1 n2 n3 nk 00 27 66 n1 n2 n3 nkO Sets vertical tab positions n1 through nk specify the line number for the vertical tab s for a maximum of 64 tab positions NUL must be used as the sequence terminator The physical position on the paper is the product of n and the current line spacing Subsequent line spacing changes alter the tab position If the value of n defines a tab stop that exceeds the forms length that tab position is ignored Vertical tab positions are set by control code ESC B and executed by control code VT The tab positions must be in ascending order or the sequence terminates More information on Proprinter XL vertical tab setting is provided in Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting If the ESC B command is followed immediately by a NUL the vertical tab positions are cleared The following sample illustrates vertical tab setting ESC B 15 20 O SETS A VERTICAL TAB AT LINE 15 AND AT LINE 20 CONTR
66. the Page Length in 1 1000 units MEDIA HANDLING Value Sets the type of media handling 0 Continuous 1 Tear Off Strip 2 Tear Off 3 Peel Off 4 Cut MODE Sets the print mode to Thermal Transfer Sets the print mode to Direct Thermal WIDTH Value Sets the Page Width in 1 1000 units PTR END none none Exits the PTR SETUP Summary of the CONFIG Command The UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD command can be used for uploading and downloading complete printer configurations If a customer needs to configure 50 printers identically the customer needs only configure one printer and UPLOAD the configurations The UPLOADed configurations may then be DOWNLOADed to other printers eliminating the necessity for the operator to configure each printer manually The UPLOAD command will always place a header and a footer into the uploaded data This header will be the DOWNLOAD command followed by the configuration number The footer will be the DOWNLOAD END command The operator should be aware that the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD commands use a secondary copy of the menu structure which does not affect the printer s active configuration This allows the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD commands to operate without affecting the printer s current configuration If the operator intends to use one of the DOWNLOADed configurations the operator should reboot the printer to ensure proper operation This can be a
67. the Plot mode and may be 1 or 0 e binary equivalent of the plot data bytes must be known to accurately address specific dot positions As shown in Figure 33 a dot is printed at the location addressed by each of bits 1 through 6 in the data byte that is set 1 or true 265 Chapter 8 P Series Compatible Plot Mode Odd Even Dot Plotting 266 EVEN DOT PLOT DATA BYTE MSB B BIT2 BIT4 BITS BIT6 BIT7 BIT8 NOTE BIT 6 AND OR BIT 7 MUST BE 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 FOR PLOT MODE DOT COLUMN 1 OF NEXT CHARACTER COLUMN DOT COLUMN 12 OF PREVIOUS CHARACTER COLUMN NOTE IN ACTUAL E TO PRINT ON THE SAME ROW NOT USED Pep BIT2 BITS BIT4 BITS BIT6 BIT7 SE ODD DOT PLOT DATA BYTE Figure 33 P Series Plot Data Byte Format See Appendix C P Series Plot Byte Definition for a complete definition of the valid plot data bytes Plot Data Line Format A plot data line may contain the following plot data bytes When using 132 column paper the maximum bytes are 132 for a horizontal dot density of 60 dpi or 198 bytes for a horizontal dot density of 90 dpi If Auto Line Feed is disabled any bytes over the maximum are lost If the maximum is exceeded and Auto Line Feed is enabled a Line Feed LF is forced and the remaining plot data is printed as text on the next line Normal Density Plot For normal density plot the plot line contains Control Code hex 05 plot data bytes and a Line Termi
68. to the next paper motion command Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript overlapping lines may occur Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap The following example illustrates n 216 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC 3 50 SETS LINE SPACING AT 50 216 INCH INCREMENTS FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED Overscoring ASCII Code ESC _ Hex Code 1B5Fn Dec Code 2795n Purpose Enables or disables automatic overscoring of all characters where n 0 to disable automatic overscoring hex 00 or hex 30 n 1 to enable automatic overscoring hex 01 or hex 31 Comment When automatic overscore is enabled all characters including Spaces are overscored until disabled Example The following sample illustrates automatic overscoring and overscoring reset CONTROL CODE ESC 1 CONTROL CODE ESC O DISABLES AUTOMATIC OVERSCORING 103 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Print Mode Pitch Selection ASCII Code ESC X mn ESC nq Code 1B58 mn 1B 5B n 71 Dec Code 27 88 mn 27 91 n113 Purpose Selects the print mode Letter Gothic Courier or OCR and character pitch in characters per inch cpi where In ESC X mn m Print Mode code n Pitch cpi An asterisk hex 2A may be substituted for m or n Whenever the asterisk repl
69. width Set the Auto Label Mapping wide width in units of 1 1000 e g a wide width value of 1000 1 which represents the width of the image in the file sent from the host which is to be auto label mapped into several labels each of which will have a width of narrow width of labels wide width narrow width rounded down ALM NARROW narrow width Set the Auto Label Mapping narrow width which represents the width of one auto mapped label in units of 1 1000 e g a narrow width value of 1000 1 This width should be set prior to the wide width In addition it can never exceed the physical width of the printer If it does the narrow width will be automatically reduced to the Page Width value set in the configuration menu ALM ENABLE N W Set Auto Label Mapping to Narrow Wide or Off Enter N for Narrow W for Wide or any other letter to disable ALM By default only the Narrow option is implemented 286 Commands Table 80 PTR SETUP Commands continued Command Sub Command Parameter Description ENGINE IMAGE SHFT H Value Shifts the image Value horizontally in 1 1000 units If Value is out of the settable range 1 to 1 the command will be ignored IMAGE SHFT V Value Shifts the image Value vertically in 1 1000 units If Value is out of the settable range 1 to 6 the command will be ignored LENGTH Value Sets
70. 4 Example 753774 the first four digits plus 0 75370 0000 plus the FIFTH digit 00007 6 5 6 7 8 9 Examples 213756 517019 the first five digits of the zero suppressed number 21375 51701 0000 plus the SIXTH digit 00006 00009 254 UPC Shipping UPC Shipping The UPCSHIP bar code structure is shown in Figure 24 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT DN UPPER GUARD BAND 1 E zs I QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET E LOWER GUARD BAND l 1 L 4J OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 24 UPCSHIP Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones The quiet zones should be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning Both start and stop codes contain bars and spaces They are automatically produced Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent numeric characters The structure is 2 wide elements bars or spaces and 3 narrow elements Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data Bar code data is printed below the horizontal bar code symbol
71. 4400 Thermal Label Printers ASCII Programmer s Reference Manual Form Number G544 5733 01 Copyright IBM Corp 2000 2003 4400 Thermal Label Printers ASCII Programmer s Reference Manual G544 5733 01 NOTE Before using the information and the product it works with make sure that you read the general information under Notices below Second Edition 2003 This edition applies to the IBM 4400 Thermal Label Printer The following paragraph does not apply to any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you Requests for IBM publications should be made to your IBM representative or to the IBM branch office serving your locality Publications are not stocked at the address given below You may send your comments by facsimile to 1 800 524 1519 by E mail to print pubs vnet ibm com or by mail to THE IBM PRINTING SYSTEMS DIVISION INFORMATION DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT H7FE BUILDING 003G P O BOX 1900 BOULDER CO 80301 9191 USA When you send information to IBM or IBM Printing Systems Division you grant a non excl
72. 6 hex 36 Greek NLQ 10 cpi 7 hex 37 Graphics DP 10 cpi 8 hex 38 Graphics NLQ 10 cpi 9 hex 39 Scientific DP 10 cpi 10 hex 3A Scientific DP 12 cpi 11 hex 3B Scientific NLQ 10 cpi 12 hex Multinational at Primary set mode and pitch Comment asterisk character hex 2A may be substituted for the numeric values of x y or z If the asterisk is the value selected for x the character set does not change If is the value selected for y or z the previously selected international language and or extended character set for the selected character set is used The character set international language and extended character set can also be selected from the printer control panel The control code settings override the control panel selection Except for the asterisk value discussed above values other than those shown in the tables result in the control sequence being terminated CHARACTER SET SELECT THIS IS THE IBM ASCII CHARACTER SET UNDERNEATH IS THE EXTENDED SET Ue pS pS pr t H EL o bhr i bee THIS IS THE ECMA 94 LATIN 1 CHARACTER SET UNDERNEATH IS THE EXTENDED SET OE EO GEA AATA TAGETy AGOATAAA AEAOAAGAO GAG 34 Characters 80 9F Control Codes Characters 80 9F Control Codes ASCII Code SFCC 7 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment SFCC 37 SFCC 55 Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 through 9F are control codes Cancels Character Se
73. 6 SFCC 66 Dec Code 6 SFCC 102 Purpose Selects line spacing of 8 or 10 3 for the current line only Comment default line spacing is reselected automatically after one line Line spacing may be selected either through the control panel or by line spacing control codes The control code setting overrides the control panel line spacing setting If the alternate line spacing selected from the control panel is 8 the ACK control code sets the line spacing to 8 Ipi If 10 3 Ipi was selected from the control panel the ACK control code sets the line spacing to 10 3 7 72 inch Example The following example illustrates printing a single line of text at 8 Ipi CONTROL CODE ACK SENE 8 NES Pits SPACING OR ONE LIN THE DEFAULT LINE Y amp pACING IS THEN RESELECTED AUTOMATICALLY 47 Chapter 2 _ Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Line Spacing 7 72 Inch ASCII Code SFCC 1 Hex Code SFCC 31 Dec Code SFCC 49 Purpose Specifies the line spacing at 7 72 inch 10 3 increments Comment When the 7 72 inch line spacing control code is received all lines are printed at the 7 72 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting and the message display reflects the line spacing as 10 3 lines per inch Caution should be used when combining this control code with other pr
74. 9 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Bit Image Mode Double Density ASCII Code ESC L n1 n2 Hex Code 1 4 7 2 Dec Code 27 76 n1 n2 Purpose Selects Double Density Bit Image graphics where n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment For detailed information see the Bit Image section in Chapter 8 Graphics Example following example produces Double Density Bit Image graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image Mode example Note that the amount of data must be doubled for double density the data is used 54 times rather than 27 Double Density Bit Image Graphics NSNNNSNNISNNNNNSNNNNNNSNNNNNNSNSNNSNISSSNNSNSSNNSNSNSNSSNNNNNSN 120 Bit Image Mode Double Density Double Speed Bit Image Mode Double Density Double Speed ASCII Code ESC Y n1 n2 Code 1 59 7 2 Dec Code 27 89 n1 n2 Purpose Selects Double Density Double Speed Bit Image graphics where n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied espec
75. 9 Introduction isse e lube EE e Rx e e EET Rex 149 Epson FX 1050 Default Values and 150 Epson Emulation Exceptions and Differences 152 Epson Character 153 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes id eet Pme ep eO rr t itur Pers 154 Format for Control Code 154 Escape Sequences sse 154 Set and Reset Codes nee 155 MNT ERE 155 Print Modes Supported for Character Sets 156 Control Code Index 157 BaCkSPaCe 159 mM RE 160 GancelEilie 2 5 ue e te iie Ya Be d R ET 160 Carriage Return ere yal ei 160 Character Pitch 10 cpi 161 Character Pitch 12 cpi 161 Gharacter Pitch 15 Cpl te etate 161 Character Set Select International Languages 162 Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0 163 Condensed Print o tt e e tt t tebe 163 Condensed Print Reset ssssssssssssseeeeeeenn 164 Cut Sheet Paper Feed 164 Define a Download
76. A ASCII USA 1 31 German French EBCDIC French 2 32 Swedish German German 3 33 Danish English UK English UK 4 34 Norwegian Danish Norw Danish 5 35 Finnish Swedish Swedish 6 36 English UK Italian Italian 7 37 Dutch Spanish Spanish 8 38 French Japanese Japanese 9 39 Spanish French Canadian French Canadian OA 3A Italian Latin American Dutch OB 3B Turkish Danish ll Finnish OC 3C Japanese Spanish ll Swiss OD 3D Latin American ll OE 3E OF 3F 10 40 11 41 currently undefined 12 42 13 43 14 44 15 45 Comment The international character set can also be selected from the control panel The control code setting overrides the control panel character set selection Values other than those selectable from Table 21 are ignored Condensed Print Example The following example illustrates international character selection using the IBM PC character set CONTROL CODE ESC R 5 SELECTS THE SWEDISH CHARACTER SET SHOWN BENEATH THE USA CASCII CHARACTERS CVNI Ci Condensed Print ASCII Code SI ESC SI Hex Code 1B OF Dec Code 15 27 15 Purpose Selects 17 characters per inch cpi condensed print format Comment Condensed print can also be selected using control code ESC X See Print Mode Pitch Selection on page 104 The Serial Matrix condensed print control code SI affects all subsequent characters After receiving code SI all charac
77. ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1 7 7D Dec Code 27 12412559 Purpose Control code sequence used to introduce the super set commands Comment Super set commands affect the ASCII Emulation as a whole regardless of the printer protocol currently active The commands are sent from the host in the data stream to the printer and provide the following capabilities e Select a printer protocol e Change the page orientation Define various font attributes including typeface and print size e Select proportional fonts See Chapter 7 Super Set Programming for further information on the Super Set commands 192 Superscript and Subscript Printing Superscript and Subscript Printing ASCII Code ESC 5 Hex Code 1B53n Dec Code 2783n Purpose Selects superscript or subscript printing where n NUL hex 00 or 0 hex 30 to enable superscript printing hex 01 or 1 hex 31 to enable subscript printing Comment Superscript Subscript font prints at one half the normal vertical character height and at twice the normal vertical density When the superscript subscript control code is received all characters are superscript or subscript until reset by the superscript subscript reset control code or printer reset Emphasized print is ignored in the superscript subscript print mode You can print both superscript and subscript characters in the same character column by using the Backspace BS control code but th
78. Am Zo22GGw z cG oco ff C amp Po Do o Do Do L2 un creme Co gt gt gt gt gt gt gt OD m o BOB 32330 0 amp O C m m O O m D ww Ph MD m C C 7E Pee uo H COCOG 162 Comment This control code setting overrides a character set selection made at the operator panel Example The following example illustrates international character selection using the IBM PC character set CONTROL CODE ESC R 5 SELECTS THE SWEDISH CHARACTER SET SHOWN BENEATH THE USA CHARACTERS Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0 Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0 ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B3D Dec Code 27 61 Purpose Sets the most significant bit MSB of all incoming data to 0 Comment The is bit number 7 This command only affects text and control code data Graphics data pass through unchanged Some applications always set the MSB of print data to one 1 which results in italic or graphics printing in Epson printers This command overcomes the problem NOTE This command does not suppress hexadecimal FF from printing Condensed Print ASCII Code SI ESC SI Hex Code 1B OF Dec Code 15 27 15 Purpose print pitch as close to 60 of the former character width as possible up to 20 characters per inch Comment The condensed print command affects all subsequent characters After the printer receive
79. Attributes n1 Values n1 Hex Function 03 Set character height and line feed settings according to the value of n2 If n1 03 there is no n3 04 Set character height line feed and character settings according to the values of n2 and n3 where n2 can take on the following characteristics Table 31 Select Attributes n2 Values n2 Hex Function 00 No change 01 Set single height characters 02 Set double height characters 10 Set single line spacing 11 Set single height characters and single line spacing 12 Set double height characters and single line spacing 20 Set double line spacing 21 Set single height characters and double line spacing 22 Set double height characters and double line spacing where n3 can take on the following characteristics Table 32 Select Attributes n3 Values n3 Hex Function 00 No change 01 Set single width characters 02 Set double width characters 142 Select Font Print Mode Comment All other values of n1 n2 and n3 are ignored Example CONTROL CODE ESC n1 NUL NUL NUL n2 n3 SELECTS MULTIPLE PRINT ATTRIBUTES IN ONE COMMAND FOR EXAMPLE TARTSD S DOUBLE HIGH SINGLE SPACED DOUBI THIS SHOULD BE BACK TO NORMAL Select Font Print Mode ASCII Code ESC I n Hex Code 1B49n Dec Code 2773n Purpose Selects the print mode where n can take the following values Table 33 Select Font Print M
80. B 47 Dec 27 71 Attribute Set and Reset Codes Certain print attributes are set and reset turned on or off by using the appropriate ESC code sequence and the hexadecimal numbers 01 03 all odd or 00 02 all even Expanded Print Superscript Subscript Print and Underline are attributes that are set reset in this fashion Control Code Index Control Code Index The following index lists the control codes by function and lists the ASCII mnemonic and page number NOTE Some control code functions can be accomplished using another control code sequence or via control panel selection FUNCTION Paper Motion Form Feed Line Feed Line Feed n 216 Inch 1 Line Only Vertical Tab Page Format Backspace Bottom Margin Set Bottom Margin Set Cancel Cancel Carriage Return Carriage Return Set Forms Length Set Inches Forms Length Set Lines Horizontal Tab Horizontal Tab Set Reset Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi Line Spacing 7 72 Inch 10 3 Line Spacing n 72 Inch Line Spacing n 216 Inch Margins Left Right Set Select Proportional Spacing Top of Form Vertical Tab Set Clear Print Attributes Bold Print Set Bold Print Cancel Condensed Print Condensed Print Reset Character Pitch 12 cpi Emphasized Print Emphasized Print Reset Expanded Double Wide Print Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only ASCII CODE ESC5n ESC C NUL ESC Cn HT ESC D n1 n2
81. B2Fc Dec Code 2747c Purpose Selects a vertical tab channel set by ESC b where c 0 through 7 Comment Subsequent VT hex 0B commands use tab table specified by If no tab table is selected channel 0 is used 187 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position in 1 60 Inch ASCII Code ESC n1 n2 Hex Code 1B24n1 n2 Dec Code 27 36 n1 n2 Purpose Moves the logical print head to an absolute horizontal print position using 1 60 inch increments where n1 256n2 the unsigned distance in inches 60 from the left margin Comment If the distance goes beyond right margin the sequence is ignored Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1 ASCII Code ESC gt Hex Code 1B Dec Code 27 62 Purpose Sets the most significant bit MSB of all incoming data to 1 Comment The MSB is bit number 7 This command affects only text and control code data Graphics data pass through unchanged Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1 120 Inch ASCII Code ESC SP n Hex Code 1B20n Dec Code 2732n Purpose Permits character spacing adjustments in 1 120 inch increments where n 0 through 127 hex 00 through 7F Comment Setting n 0 restores normal intercharacter spacing ESC SP n SETS INTERCHARACTER SPACING FOR EXAMPLE THIS IS WIDE CHARACTER SPACING AND THIS IS NORMAL CHARACTER SPACING 188 Set Margin Left Set Margin Left ASCII Code ESC n
82. CPI PRINTED IN COURIER 13 CPI PRINTED IN COURIER 15 CPI PRINTED IN COURIER 17 CPI PRINTING IN OCR A FONT PRINTED IN OCR A LOCPI PRINTING IN OCR B FONT PRINTED IN OCR B 10 CPI 106 Printer Deselect Printer Deselect ASCII Code DC3 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 13 19 Places printer in the deselected state When the configuration parameter PRINTER SELECT is enabled this control code disables the printer from receiving and printing data from the host Until a DC1 Printer Select command is received all subsequent data to the printer is ignored Also when the configuration parameter PRINTER SELECT is enabled and saved in the configuration the printer powers up in the deselected state Printer Select ASCII Code DC1 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 11 17 Places printer in the selected state When the configuration parameter PRINTER SELECT is enabled this control code allows the printer to receive and print data from the host Printer Deselect DC3 disables the printer from receiving data Skip Over Perforation ASCII Code ESC Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment 1B4E n 27 8 Selects the number of lines at the current line spacing for the paper to skip at the bottom of the perforated page n 1 through 127 hex 01 through 7F to select the number of lines to skip If the value of n exceeds the current form s length it is ignored The actual dist
83. DF parameter the overall height of the bars is reduced to make room for a guard band and the human readable characters The printed data field will be formatted with spaces or parentheses denoting particular data fields such as the application identifier Special characters such as start stop subset switch modulo 103 check digit and FNC1 do not appear in the human readable data The readable data is oriented along the bar code from start code to stop code It may be positioned above or below a bar code Modulo 103 Check Digit A modulo 103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol immediately in front of the stop code in the same manner as the Code 128 bar code The check digit verifies accurate scanning The start code is included in the check digit algorithm The modulo 103 check digit is not displayed in the readable data field Modulo 10 Data Field Check Digit for SSCC 18 and SCC 14 Al 00 called the Serial Shipping Container Code or SSCC 18 takes 18 additional numerical data bytes The last data byte is a mod 10 check digit on the preceding seventeen data bytes Counting the two zeros of the application identifier the mod 10 check digit is the twentieth byte in the data field Al 01 called the Shipping Container Code or SCC 14 takes 14 additional numerical data bytes The last data byte is a mod 10 check digit on the preceding 13 data bytes Counting the zero and the one of the application id
84. Dec Code 2795n Purpose Enables or disables automatic overscoring of all characters where if n 2 1 3 5 any odd value automatic overscoring is enabled if n 0 2 4 any even value automatic overscoring is disabled Comment When automatic overscore is enabled all characters including Spaces are overscored Full height graphics characters are not overscored Example The following sample illustrates automatic overscoring and overscoring reset CONTROL CODE ESC 1 CONTROL CODE ESC O DISABLES AUTOMATIC OVERSCORING Print Control Codes ASCII Code ESC n1 n2 Hex Code 1 5 2 Dec Code 27 92 n1 n2 Purpose Prints the characters assigned to specified hex codes as characters rather than interpreting the code values as command parameters or control codes where n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow each byte represents one hex code Print One Control Code ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B5En Dec Code 2794n Purpose Prints the character corresponding to n where n hex code of the character 141 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Select Attributes ASCII Code ESC n1 NUL NUL NUL n2 n3 Hex Code 1B 5B 40 n1 00 00 00 n2 n3 Dec Code 279164n1000n2n3 Purpose Selects double height and double width attributes as well as either single or double height line spacing where n1 can take on the following characteristics Table 30 Select
85. Extended Code Number System Character Offer and End of Offer n4 n1 n5 n4 8102 Coupon Extended Code Number System Character Preceded by Zero 4 1 1 90 Mutually Agreed Between Trading Partners n2 an 30 91 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 92 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 93 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 94 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 95 Internal Carriers n2 an 30 96 Internal Carriers n2 an 30 97 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 98 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 99 Internal n2 an 30 To indicate only year and month DD must be filled with 00 Plus one digit for length indication Plus one digit for decimal point indication Data Value Representation a alphabetic characters n numeric characters an alpha numeric characters numeric characters fixed length an 3 up to 3 alpha numeric n 3 up to 3 numeric characters characters Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start and stop codes identify the leading and trailing ends of the bar code UCC EAN 128 uses unique start codes for character subsets B and C and a stop code common to both An automatic mode switching feature is used to
86. F Printable Symbols Characters 80 9F Printable Symbols ASCII Code ESC 6 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 1B 36 27 54 Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 through 9F are printable symbols Also includes hex codes 03 through 06 and 15 in the Serial Matrix printer protocol Cancels Character Set Select activated by ESC 7 or ESC u This feature is also selectable from the control panel see the Alternate Set 80 9F parameter in the configuration chapter of your User s Guide Characters 80 9F Printable Symbols ASCII Code ESC Hex Code Dec Code Purpose 1B 75 27 117 Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 through 9F are printable symbols Hex codes 03 through 06 and 15 are treated like control codes Cancels Character Set Select activated by ESC 6 or ESC 7 89 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Character Set Select International Languages ASCII Code ESCR n Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Table 21 International Character Sets 1B52n 2782n Specifies the international language set identified by n in the basic character set selected from the control panel ECMA 94 Latin 1 IBM PC Multinational and DEC Multinational n corresponds to the language as shown in Table 21 below 90 n Character Set Selected ECMALatin 1 esed or Multinational iced 0 30 ASCII USA ASCII USA ASCII US
87. FU is not loaded and Vertical Tab control code is used a single line feed results 74 4 Serial Matrix Printer Protocol Introduction This chapter describes the Serial Matrix emulation host control codes Emulation refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language A printer control language is the coding system used to convey manipulate and print data Carriage Return print quality character attributes such as bold and underline margins and tabs are typical functions selected by printer control language codes In this manual the terms emulation printer protocol and printer control language are synonymous The Serial Matrix emulation is very similar to the code system used by an IBM Graphics Printer but contains more features This emulation enables your line matrix printer to print files coded for a serial matrix printer To select the Serial Matrix emulation mode as the active printer emulation select ASCII Emulation from the EMULATION menu and Serial Matrix from the Printer Protocol menu as described in the User s Guide The Serial Matrix emulation provides many configurable parameters The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 16 You can modify the emulation parameter values in two ways e Serial Matrix host control codes An extensive set of Serial Matrix control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host com
88. File System is dependent upon the printer having sufficient RAM None of the captured file data will be committed to flash until the entire file is loaded The PTR SETUP parser will interpret the command FILE IO CAPTURE If as end of file marker Receipt of the command Will cause all file data to be written to flash The file system allocates RAM for temporary data storage in 1 Kbyte blocks If at any time during the file download the printer runs out of RAM a warning will be displayed on the front panel and as much of the file as possible will be saved in flash To download larger files you may need to add additional RAM to the printer Three things can limit the ability to save a file insufficient RAM insufficient Flash and lack of empty file system entries Flash can only be written once before it needs to be optimized As a result the maximum file size is limited to the largest unwritten block of Flash If any of these problems occur the printer will display an error message and will attempt to provide the operator with a description of what steps to take to correct the error Normally the solution will involve optimizing the Flash File System This can be accomplished by selecting the Optimize amp Reboot function in the Flash File System menu under MAINT MISC NOTE After selecting the Optimize amp Reboot function do not shut off the printer s power until after the printer returns to the power on state Loss of power during
89. Form ASCII Code ESC 4 Hex Code 1B34 Dec Code 2752 Purpose Sets the current paper position as top of form 145 Chapter 5 146 Configuring the Proprinter 1 XL Emulation with Control Codes Underline ASCII Code ESC n Hex Code 1B2Dn Dec Code 2745n Purpose Enables or disables automatic underlining of all characters where if n 00 02 04 all even automatic underlining is disabled if n 01 03 05 all odd automatic underlining is enabled Comment When automatic underline is enabled all characters including spaces are underlined until disabled Example following sample illustrates automatic underlining and underlining reset CONTROL CODE ESC 1 ENABLES AUTOMATIC UNDERLINING CONTROL CODE ESC O DISABLES AUTOMATIC UNDERLINING Unidirectional Printing ASCII Code ESCU n Hex Code 1B55n Dec Code 2785n Purpose Sets or cancels unidirectional printing Discussion The printer ignores this command Vertical Tab ASCII Code VT Hex Code Dec Code 11 Purpose Prints the data in the buffer and advances the paper to the next vertical tab position Comment In Proprinter XL protocol vertical tab positions are set by control code ESC B and executed by control code VT In this mode if vertical tabs are loaded the paper position moves to the next vertical tab position If a vertical tab format is not defined the paper position is advanced to the next line at the current line
90. GgHhI iJ jKkL 1MmNnOoPp CONTROL CODE ESC H CANCELS BOLD CHARACTER PRINTING 83 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Bold Print Reset ASCII Code ESC H Hex Code 1B 48 Dec Code 27 72 Purpose Resets bold character printing Comment The bold print reset control code only resets the bold print character attribute Other print attributes such as double wide printing are not affected Example Refer to the Bold Print control code for a sample of bold character print set and reset Cancel ASCII Code CAN Hex Code 18 Dec Code 24 Purpose Clears the print buffer of all printable symbols since the last paper motion command was received Comment This control code may be used as a delete line function but should be used with extreme care to avoid possible misprinting This control code cancels the double wide attribute set by SO if active No other print attributes are affected 84 Carriage Return Carriage Return ASCII Code CR Hex Code 0D Dec Code 13 Purpose Returns the logical print head to the first character column Comment resets the pointer to the first character position The CR code may or may not cause printing or paper motion depending on the DEFINE CR CODE configuration parameter value If the DEFINE CR CODE submenu displays Define CR Code CR CR the characters following the CR are printed over the previous characters on the line If identical characte
91. Hex Code Dec Code where 1B6C n 27 108 n n number of columns from the left edge of the physical page to the beginning of the print line n 1 through 232 hex 00 through hex E8 Purpose Sets the left margin to n columns in the current font Comment Be sure to use the alphabetic lowercase l as in left rather than the uppercase i I for this command The number of inches of margin does not vary if the font character width or horizontal dot density changes This command automatically clears and resets horizontal tabs to every eight characters The smallest possible space between the left and right margins is the width of one double wide 10 cpi character If a margin control code violates this minimum distance it is ignored Settings in proportional mode are treated as 10 cpi Set Margin Right ASCII Code ESC Qn Hex Code 1B51n Dec Code 2781n where n number of columns from the left edge of the physical page to the end of the print line n 1 through 232 hex 00 through hex E8 Purpose Sets the right margin to n columns at the current character width Comment The number of inches of margin does not vary if the font character width or horizontal dot density changes This command automatically clears and resets horizontal tabs to every eight characters The smallest possible space between the left and right margins is the width of one double wide 10 cpi character If a margin control code violates this minimu
92. I Code BEL Hex Code 07 Dec Code 7 Purpose Sounds the printer s buzzer beeper Comment The BEL function sounds the buzzer beeper for 0 2 seconds upon receipt of this command Cancel Line ASCII Code CAN Hex Code 18 Dec Code 24 Purpose Clears all unprinted data from a line but does not affect control codes Comment You can use this control code to delete a line but do so with caution to avoid possible misprinting This control code cancels the double wide attribute set by SO No other print attributes are affected The logical print head goes to the print position it had after the last CR or paper motion command Carriage Return ASCII Code CR Hex Code 00 Dec Code 13 Purpose Prints the data in the buffer then returns the logical print head to the left margin Comment Subsequent data are emphasized A line feed is appended if the printer is configured from the operator panel for CR CR LF When CR CR LF this code cancels all one line only emphasis and font controls double wide from SO and ESC SO and unidirectional printing from ESC lt 160 Character Pitch 10 cpi Character Pitch 10 cpi ASCII Code ESC P Hex Code 1B 50 Dec Code 2780 Purpose Sets character pitch to 10 characters per inch cpi Comment This command is normally used to cancel 12 cpi Character Pitch 12 cpi ASCII Code ESC M Hex Code 1B 4D Dec Code 2777 Purpose Sets character pitch to 12 characters per inch cpi
93. II Emulation is capable of combining graphics and characters text on the same page in two ways e Use Bit Image graphics or P Series Plot mode to produce characters as well as graphics e combination of text not plot and graphics can be mixed on the same page within all protocols Text and graphics can be mixed on the same line however only by using the Bit Image graphics in the Epson Serial Matrix or Proprinter XL protocols Any character or symbol can be created in the Plot mode or with Bit Image graphics simply by addressing and plotting the appropriate dot positions Either Bit Image or Plot mode graphics can be mixed with text within the page on a line by line basis Each line of graphics data must include a graphics control code or the emulation automatically defaults to the print mode Using Bit Image graphics it is possible to use the print mode to produce text on one print pass followed by a print pass to produce graphics on the same line however text characters can be affected by the Bit Image data when combined on the same line 269 Chapter 8 Combining Graphics and Text 270 9 Vertical Page Formatting Introduction The ASCII Emulation includes the standard Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU for use with the P Series and P Series XQ protocols and a Vertical Format Unit VFU for use with the Serial Matrix Proprinter XL and Epson FX protocols Each vertical format unit provides an efficient method fo
94. Latin 1 8859 1 609 NCR Turkish 105 MS DOS CP 720 310 Latin 5 8859 9 610 PST Turkish 106 Sakr CP 714 311 Latin 9 8859 15 611 Unis 1 Turkish 107 Aptec CP 715 400 DEC 256 Greek 612 Code Page 853 108 CP 786 401 ELOT 928 Greek 613 INFO Turkish 109 Arabic CP 864 199 Chapter 7 _ The Super Set Commands Table 46 Proprinter XL Character Sets n Character Set n Character Set n Character Set 000 IBM Code Page 437 110 Arabic 1046 402 Greek 3 001 IBM Code Page 850 111 Arabic Lam 1 403 ABY Greek 002 OCR A 112 Arabic Lam 2 404 ABG Greek 003 OCR B 200 Cyrillic 866 405 ELOT 927 Greek 004 Multinational 201 Cyrillic CP 437 406 Greek 851 005 Arabic 202 Cyrillic 113 407 Greek 437 006 Greek 203 Cyrillic 8859 5 408 Greek 8859 7 007 Hebrew 204 ISO 915 500 Hebrew Old 008 Portuguese 205 Code Page 855 501 Hebrew New 009 Spanish 206 7 Bit Cyrillic 502 Hebrew DEC 010 Latin 1 207 Ukrainian 503 Hebrew Latin 1 011 Latin 2 Slavic 852 300 Latin 2 8859 2 600 Data General Turkish 012 Farsi 301 Latin 2 852 601 DEC Turkish 013 Turkish 302 Mazovia 602 IBM Turkish 014 Cyrillic 303 Kamenicky 603 Siemens Turkish 100 ASMO 449 304 Roman 8 604 PTT Turkish 101 ASMO 449 305 PC 437 Slavic 605 IBC Turkish 102 ASMO 708 306 Slavic 1250 606 Bull Turkish 103 ASMO 708 307 Code Page 865 607 AS400 Turkish 104 MS DOS CP710 308 Code Page 860 608 Unisys Turkish 105 MS DOS CP720 309 Latin 1 8859 1 609 NCR Turkish 106 Sakr CP 714 310 Latin 5 8859 9 610 PST Turkish 107 Apte
95. Mode Pitch Selection ASCII Code SFCC X mn SFCC nq SFCC PMODE n Hex Code 58 mn SFCC 5B n 71 Dec Code SFCC 88 mn SFCC 91 n 113 Purpose X Selects the print mode Letter Gothic Courier or OCR and character pitch in characters per inch cpi where In SFCC PMODE n n ranges from 0 through 6 to select the print mode pitch combinations available from Table 8 All other values result in an error message Command Line Error Messages are listed in Table 2 on page 27 where In SFCC X mn m Print Mode code n Pitch cpi An asterisk hex 2A may be substituted for m or n Whenever the asterisk replaces m or n its current value does not change Values other than those shown in Table 10 and Table 11 are ignored where In SFCC nq n Print Mode Pitch code values other than those shown in Table 9 are ignored q Command sequence terminator NOTE The print mode must be changed before the first printable symbol of a print line or the command sequence is deferred until the next line Comment P Series PMODE switches to the Primary Character Set and selects print mode and pitch Print mode and pitch can also be selected from the control panel The print mode pitch select control code from the host computer overrides the control panel print mode setting and the print mode and pitch selection are reflected on the message display A complete set of tables identifying pitch and dot densities for all print modes follow
96. N DOA FWD CO 232 Code 128 Table 70 Code 128C Character Set 38 31 82 38 32 83 38 33 84 38 34 85 38 35 86 38 36 87 38 37 88 38 38 89 38 39 90 39 30 91 39 31 92 39 32 93 39 33 94 39 34 95 39 35 96 39 36 97 39 37 98 39 38 99 39 39 CODEB 26 See NOTE CODEA 25 See NOTE FNC 1 21 See NOTE START C N A STOP N A 233 Chapter 7 Codes EAN 8 The EAN 8 bar code structure is shown in Figure 11 and described below SRSC START CODE CENTER CODE POSITION Na STOR CODE fe eal QUIET LEFT DATA RIGHT DATA quiet ZONE FIELD FIELD ZONE bonsa 4 OPTIONAL READABLE a DATA FIELD Figure 11 8 Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Center Stop Codes The start center stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of the bar code These codes are automatically provided Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent a limited character set numbers 0 9 and Special Characters Start Center and Stop The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of two bars a
97. OL CODE VT MOVES PAPER TO THE NEXT VERTICAL TAB CONTROL CODE VT MOVES PAPER TO THE NEXT VERTICAL TAB THIS IS LINE TWENTY 147 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter IIl XL Emulation with Control Codes 148 6 Introduction Epson FX 1050 Printer Protocol This chapter describes the Epson FX emulation host control codes Emulation refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language A printer control language is the coding system used to convey manipulate and print data It contains character codes and command sequences that configure the emulation In this manual the terms emulation printer protocol and printer control language are synonymous In Epson FX emulation mode your printer can print files coded for the Epson FX printer control language To select the Epson FX emulation as the active printer emulation select ASCII Emulation from the EMULATION menu and Epson FX from the Printer Protocol menu as described in the User s Guide The Epson FX emulation provides many configurable parameters The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 34 You can modify these parameter values in two ways Epson FX host control codes An extensive set of Epson FX control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the Epson FX control code commands
98. Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as double high superscript or subscript characters are used on the same line Example The following example illustrates n 216 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC J 200 PERFORMS A 200 216 INCH LINE FEED FUNCTION FOR ONE LINE ONLY 177 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi ASCII Code ESC 2 Hex Code 1B32 Dec Code 2750 Purpose Sets the line spacing to 1 6 inch 6 Ipi for subsequent line feeds Comment 2 is ASCII character 2 not hex 2 When ESC 2 is received all lines are printed at 6 Ipi until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset This control code overrides line spacing set at the operator panel Example The following example illustrates 1 6 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC 2 SETS LINE SPACING AT 6 LPI FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi ASCII Code ESC 0 Hex Code 1B30 Dec Code 27 48 Purpose Sets the line spacing to 1 8 inch 8 Ipi for subsequent line feeds Comment When ESC 0 is received all lines are printed at 8 until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset This control code overrides line spacing set at the operator panel Example The following example illustrates 1 8 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC O SETS LINE SPACING AT 1 8 8 LPI INCH FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES
99. Paper Length n1 Value ASCII Units of n2 0 Current CPI 1 Inches 2 Centimeters 212 Print Engine Options Plot Attributes ASCII Code SSCCV n m Hex Code SSCC 56 n3B m Dec Code SSCC 86 59 m Purpose Selects plot attributes in horizontal or vertical dots per inch DPI where nselects the horizontal DPI range 001 through 999 DPI m selects the vertical DPI range 001 through 999 DPI This command has the same effect as changing the densities in the Horizontal DPI and Vertical DPI parameters under the Plot Attributes menu on the front panel See your User s Guide for details Power Saver Time ASCII Code SSCC y n Hex Code SSCC 79n Dec Code SSCC 121 n Purpose Sets the power saver time in seconds Refer to Table 57 for valid values Table 57 Power Saver Time n Value ASCII Power Saver Time 0001 Instant timeout 0005 Five seconds 0010 Ten seconds 0015 Fifteen seconds 0030 Thirty seconds 0060 One minute 0300 Five minutes 0600 Ten minutes 0900 Fifteen minutes 1800 Thirty minutes 2700 Forty five minutes 3600 One hour 9999 No timeout 213 Chapter 7 _ The Super Set Commands Print Count ASCII Code SSCC on Hex Code SSCC6F n Dec Code SSCOC 111 where number of times to print a page ranging from 0001 through 9999 Print Intensity ASCII Code SSCC i n Hex Code SSCC 692Bn Dec Code SSCC 105 43 where print intensity ranging from 0000 thr
100. R the characters following the CR are printed over the previous characters on the line If identical characters are placed in the same position on the line those characters are printed in bold double strike print If the DEFINE CR CODE submenu displays Define CR Code CR CR LF control code CR is converted to perform a carriage return and line feed function The CR code cancels expanded double wide print when set by code SO single line printing attribute Carriage Return Set ASCII Code ESC 5 n Hex Code 1B35n Dec Code 2753n Purpose Defines the carriage return code where If n 2 1 3 5 any odd value CR CR LF This setting overrides the front panel setting If n 2 0 2 4 any even value CR CR This setting overrides the front panel setting 125 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Character Pitch 12 cpi ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B3A Dec Code 2758 Purpose Sets character pitch to 12 cpi Characters 80 9F Control Codes ASCII Code ESC 7 Hex Code 1B37 Dec Code 2755 Purpose Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 through 9F are control codes Cancels Character Set Select activated by ESC 6 Comment See the character set charts in Appendix D for the control codes Characters 80 9F Printable Symbols ASCII Code ESC 6 Hex Code 1B 36 Dec Code 2754 Purpose Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 throu
101. SC W SO double the character width Unlike the Epson FX 1050 however these codes do not double the inter character spacing The formulas for total character spacing are as follows Epson FX 1050 2 char 1 dot space Epson Emulation 2 char 1 dot space The Condensed Print SI control code condenses the character width but not the inter character spacing unlike the Epson FX 1050 which condenses both character width and spacing If one or more Backspace control codes follow directly after a Bit Image Graphics command ESC ESC L ESC Y or ESC 2 the printer backspaces into the graphic pattern the number of dots depending on the current cpi setting For an Epson FX 1050 printer one Backspace sends the logical printhead directly to the beginning of the graphics pattern When backspacing over proportionally spaced characters Epson printers move back the width of each proportional character this emulation moves back based on the current cpi setting as if proportional spacing is disabled Epson Character Sets Epson Character Sets Epson printers use five character sets The IBM Graphics Code Page 437 IBM PC Multilingual code page 0850 OCR A and OCR B character sets may be selected from the configuration menus In addition there is a unique Epson character set The Epson character set shown in Table 36 is basically the ASCII character set with the upper non ASCII set defined as italics and the usually unprintab
102. SC Y 60 120 3 Quadruple density ESC 2 120 2401 4 CRTI none 80 160 5 Plotter 1 1 none 72 144 6 CRT Il none 90 180 7 Double density plotter none 144 144 Data can be sent incorrectly In these modes no dots can be closer horizontally than the current font dot density Sending incorrect data does not damage the printer 240 dpi is simulated by combining the dots from two adjacent columns into one 120 dpi dot column Number of horizontal dots per inch the printer can make Number of dot columns available 185 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Select Italic Character Set ASCII Code ESCt n Hex Code 1B 74 Dec Code 27 116 Purpose Selects the italics characters from hex 80 through hex FF or selects the graphics characters from hex 80 through hex FF where hex 1 selects the graphics character set hex 0 selects the italics character set Comment The graphics character set is the IBM Graphics Code Page 437 ESC t n SELECTS EITHER THE ITALIC OR GRAPHIC CHARACTER SET THIS SHOULD BE IN ITALICS bbe UA WIL pf OPS tS ttg Select 9 Pin Graphics Mode ASCII Code ESC m n1 n2d1 dk Hex Code 1 5 mn n2d1 dk Dec Code 27 94 mn 1 2 1 dk Purpose on 9 pin bit image graphics mode Comment defines the plot density as shown in Table 42 on page 185 n1 256n2 The total number of columns This mode require
103. Series 41 Serial Matrix 95 Extended Character Set P Series 42 Extended Character Set Cancel P Series 42 F Factory settings Epson FX 1050 emulation 150 Proprinter Ill XL emulation 114 P Series emulation 24 P Series XQ emulation 60 Serial Matrix emulation 76 FILE IO Command Operation of 288 FIM bar code 236 Font Select Print Mode Proprinter XL 143 Font Selection Super Set Commands 201 305 Font Size Super Set Commands 202 Form Feed Epson 171 Proprinter XL 131 P Series 43 P Series XQ 69 Serial Matrix 97 Form Length and Width 204 Forms Length Set Inches Proprinter XL 131 P Series 43 Serial Matrix 97 Forms Length Set Lines Proprinter XL 132 P Series 44 Serial Matrix 98 G Graphics bit image 258 Double Density Double Speed Epson 173 Double Density Epson 172 P Series high density 51 P Series normal density 51 Quadruple Density Epson 174 Standard Density Epson 171 Graphics and Text combining 269 Graphics Mode 8 Pin 185 H Half Speed Mode On Off Epson 174 High Density Graphics P Series 51 High Density Plot Sample 265 Horizontal Image Shift Super Set Commands 210 Horizontal Movements in Printer Resolution 205 Horizontal Tab Proprinter XL 132 306 Serial Matrix 99 Horizontal Tab Execute Epson 175 Horizontal Tab Set Serial Matrix 99 Horizontal Tab Set Release Epson 175 Horizontal Tab Set Reset Proprinter XL 133 Horizontal Vertical Tabs Clear Pro
104. TAB STOPS AS FOLLOWS COLUMN 4 COLUMN 10 99 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Line Feed ASCII Code LF Hex Code 0A Dec Code 10 Purpose Prints the data in the buffer if any and advances the vertical character position one line at the current line space setting Comment configured for LF equals newline LF CR LF the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 of the new line Otherwise the logical print head does not move when configured for LF function only LFZLF ONLY The LF function cancels all single line print attributes such as double high elongated and double wide expanded characters Line Feed n 216 Inch One Line Only ASCII Code ESC Jn Hex Code 1 4 Dec Code 27 74 Purpose Advances the vertical character position 1 216 inch for one line only where 1 through 255 Comment The n 216 inch line feed control code is effective for one line only All single line only print attributes are canceled If the protocol is configured for LF equals newline LF CR LF the paper advances one line at the current line space setting and the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 The paper position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing the remainder is added to the next paper motion command Small values of n may result in overlapping l
105. THE STANDARD COMPRESSED 17 1 CPI FOR ONE LINE ONLY 67 Chapter 3 Configuring the XQ Emulation with Control Codes Delete ASCII Code DEL Hex Code 7F Dec Code 127 Purpose Deleted character results in a blank space at the corresponding character position Comment The Delete code deletes the corresponding character in the print buffer As shown in Table 14 below the four delete control codes are used to delete DATE from the print line NOTE In order for this to work correctly the printer must be configured for carriage return only If configured for a carriage return and a line feed the contents of the buffer are printed on receipt of the CR code Table 14 Delete Example Enter in Print Buffer Printed Result INVOICE DATE CR INVOICE SSSSSSSSDDDD LF Key S Space hex 20 LF Line Feed hex 0A CR Carriage Return hex OD D Delete hex 7F Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU ASCII Code DLE through US Hex Code 10 through 1F Dec Code 16 through 31 NOTE PI line is disabled in the above description ASCII and corresponding codes for EVFU functions differ when the PI line is enabled according to the printer interface being used Purpose Load and execute the EVFU Comment For detailed information see Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting 68 Elongated Characters Double High Print Elongated Characters Double High Print ASCII Code BS SO Hex Code
106. TING Bold Print Reset ASCII Code SFCC H Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example SFCC 48 SFCC 72 Resets bold character printing The bold print reset control code only resets the bold print character attribute Other print attributes such as double wide printing are not affected See the Bold Print control code above for a sample of bold character print set and reset 31 Chapter 2 _ Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Carriage Return ASCII Code CR Hex Code 0D Dec Code 13 Purpose Returns the logical print head to the first character column resets the pointer to the first character position Comment The CR code may or may not cause printing or paper motion depending on the DEFINE CR CODE configuration parameter value If the DEFINE CR CODE submenu displays Define CR Code CR CR the characters following the CR are printed over the previous characters on the line If the DEFINE CR CODE submenu displays Define CR Code CR CR LF control code CR is converted to perform a carriage return and line feed function 32 Character Set Select Character Set Select ASCII Code SFCC I xyz lowercase L Hex Code SFCC 6C xyz Dec Code 108 xyz Purpose Selects the character set extended character set and the international language for a specific character set where X is the character set Table 3 y is the international langu
107. UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED 178 Line Spacing 7 72 Inch Line Spacing 7 72 Inch ASCII Code ESC 1 Hex Code 1B 31 Dec Code 27 49 Purpose Sets the line spacing to 7 72 inch 10 3 Ipi for subsequent line feeds Comment All lines are printed at the 7 72 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset This control code overrides line spacing set at the operator panel Example The following example illustrates 7 72 inch line spacing Gt HERE URN MES Line Spacing n 72 Inch ASCII Code ESC A n Code 1B41n Dec Code 2765n Purpose Sets a line spacing of n 72 inch for subsequent line feeds where n 0 through 255 Comment When this control sequence is received all subsequent line feeds are n 72 inch until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset This setting overrides line spacing set at the operator panel Small values of n may result in overlapping lines Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript characters are used on the same line Any values set by ESC 3 line spacing n 216 inch are replaced Example The following example illustrates 20 72 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC A 20 SETS LINE SPACING AT 20 72 INCH INCREMENTS FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER LINE SPACING IS SELECTED 179 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with
108. a It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The start code is included in the check digit algorithm 8 Introduction Graphics The ASCII Emulation is capable of standard Odd Even Dot Plotting for normal and high density graphics as well as Bit Image graphics with single density double density and quad density modes Odd Even dot plotting is available for graphics when the selected protocol is P Series or P Series XQ Bit Image graphics is used when the selected protocol is Serial Matrix Proprinter XL or Epson FX Printing text and characters is the default mode of operation Consequently each line of graphics data must include a graphics control code to enable the emulation for the desired graphics mode of operation NOTE Depending on the target machine dot size the plot dot size is adjusted automatically so that one plot dot has a horizontal and vertical diameter of 1 60 inch You may also use the Horizontal DPI and Vertical DPI menus chosen via the control panel to select target machine dots 257 Chapter 8 Bitlmage Graphics Bit Image Graphics Bit Image Graphics mode is selected when the emulation is in Serial Matrix Proprinter XL or Epson FX emulation mode Bit Image Graphics are created by printing a series of vertical bit image data bytes which
109. a d 3B 4E n 3B xxxx yyyy 3B 58 mmmn 3B 50 p 3B 43 3B 48 hh 3B 44 Dec Code SSCC 99 59 d data d 59 78 n 59 xxxx 59 yyyy 59 88 mmmm 59 80 p 59 67 59 72 hh 59 68 Purpose Invokes bar codes Comment The brackets indicate optional parameters in the command string Do not include the brackets in your command These bar codes cannot be rotated or scaled If there is a printable data field in the bar code specification it prints in the Letter Gothic LG font except for UPC A and UPC E which print in OCR B Bar codes cannot be positioned beyond the bottom or right end of the currently defined logical form The command syntax prevents positioning the cursor above the current position or to the left of the form Drawing a bar code causes the printer to automatically switch to print mode The LG print mode is active until the bottom of the bar code has been printed After this you can change the print mode You can change the print mode to OCR A OCR B or back to LG between the current cursor location and the bottom of the bar code position Print mode changes to Courier are ignored in this region where t type of bar code see Table 61 Table 61 Bar Code Type Codes t Selects Bar ASCII Hex Code H 48 Australian 4 State B 42 Codabar C 43 Code 39 9 39 Code 93 D 44 Code 128 8 38 EAN 8 1 31 EAN 13 F 46 FIM G 47 German 1 2 5 49 Interleaved 2 5 X 58 Maxicode 218 Bar Code For
110. aces m or n then its current value does not change Values other than those shown in Table 23 and Table 24 are ignored where In ESC nq n Print Mode Pitch code values other than those shown in Table 22 are ignored q Command sequence terminator NOTE The print mode must be changed before the first printable symbol of a print line or the command sequence is deferred until the next line Comment Print mode and pitch can also be selected from the control panel The print mode pitch select control code from the host computer overrides the control panel print mode setting and the print mode and pitch selection are reflected on the message display A complete set of tables identifying pitch and dot densities for all print modes follows Table 22 Print Mode and Pitch ESC nq n Print Mode and Pitch Courier 10 cpi Letter Gothic 10 cpi Letter Gothic 12 cpi Letter Gothic 12 cpi ao Roo 597929759775 A IN Letter Gothic 13 cpi 104 Print Mode Pitch Selection Table 23 Horizontal and Vertical Dot Density ESC X m pisi d Vertical Density Print Mode 0 30 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 1 31 X dpi y dpi Courier 2 32 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 3 33 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 4 34 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 5 35 X dpi y dpi OCR A 6 36 X dpi y dpi OCR B 7 87 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 8 38 x dpi y dpi Letter Gothic The hex values shown i e 0 and 30 ar
111. age for the selected character set Table 4 z is the extended character set for the selected character set Table 5 Table 3 Character Set Select x x Character Set 0 hex 30 IBM PC 1 hex 31 Multinational 2 hex 32 ECMA Latin 1 3 hex 33 DEC Multinational Table 4 International Language Select X 0 hex 30 x 1 hex 31 x 2 hex 32 x 3 hex 33 Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Multinational 0 hex 30 ASCII USA ASCII USA ASCII USA ASCII USA 1 hex 31 French EBCDIC German French 2 hex 32 German Swedish German 3 hex 33 English UK Danish English UK 4 hex 34 Danish Norwegian Norwegian Danish 5 hex 35 Swedish Finnish Swedish 6 hex 36 Italian English UK Italian 7 hex 37 Spanish Dutch Spanish 8 hex 38 Japanese French Japanese 9 hex 39 French Canadian Spanish French Canadian 10 hex 3A Latin American Italian Dutch 11 hex 3B Turkish Finnish 12 hex 3C Japanese Swiss 33 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Table 5 Extended Character Set Select z 0 hex 30 X 1 hex 31 X 2 hex 32 x z 8 hex 33 Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Multinational 0 hex 30 IBM PC 0437 Mult Extended Set Barcode 10 cpi DEC Mult Ext Set 1 hex 31 IBM PC 0850 Mult DP 10 cpi 2 hex 32 Mult DP 12 cpi 3 hex 33 Mult NLQ 10 cpi 4 hex 34 Greek DP 10 cpi 5 hex 35 Greek DP 12 cpi
112. al Code 9 Digit Numeric for US OR 6 Digit Alphanumeric for Canada 15 16 Separator so 17 Secondary Message Free Format 239 Chapter 7 240 Bar Codes UPS Shipping Data Field This syntax begins with seven encoded data characters followed by a date yy The first four characters are the Message Header and the next five are the Transportation Data Format Header The format of the Message Header is gt Rs The Transportation Data Format Header is O1Gs lt yy gt where yy is the year and G s and R s are control characters The structure is shown in Table 72 Table 72 UPS Shipping Data Fields charactar Title Data Positions 0 3 Message Header gt Rs 4 8 Transportation Data 01Gs lt yy gt Format Header 9 17 Postal Code 9 Digit Numeric for US OR 6 Digit Alphanumeric for Canada 18 Separator Gs 19 21 Country Code Numeric 22 Separator Gs 23 25 Class of Service Numeric 26 Separator Gs 27 Secondary Message As per the UPS Guide To Barcoding MSI The MSI bar code structure is shown in Figure 17 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION 9 1 1 UPPER GUARD BAND l m i QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET ZONE CODE CODE zoNE HEIGHT 4 LOWER GUARD BAND I L zc OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 17 MSI Structure
113. ample illustrates Expanded Print for one line only CONTROL CODE SO SELECTS Another example of expanded printing is shown for Expanded Double Wide Print ESC W on page 129 EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING FOR ONE LINE ONLY Expanded Double Wide Print Reset 1 Line ASCII Code DC4 ESC DC4 Hex Code 14 1B 14 Dec Code 20 27 20 Purpose Cancels expanded double wide print set by SO where If the emulation is set at 5 cpi it is set to 10 cpi If the emulation is set at 6 cpi it is set to 12 cpi If the emulation is set at 8 55 cpi itis set to 17 1 cpi Form Feed Form Feed ASCII Code FF Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 0C 12 Prints the data in the buffer advances the paper position to the next top of form and moves the character position to the first character column The default forms length is determined by the configuration in nonvolatile memory Forms length is set by using the control panel or forms length control codes Code FF cancels all single line only print attributes The Form Feed command reacts differently when the VFU is active See Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting Forms Length Set Inches ASCII Code ESC C NUL n Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment 1B 4300 n 27670n Sets the length of forms paper in inches n whole numbers from 1 through 21 hex 01 through hex 15 to specify the number of inches on a page Upon receipt of this code the curr
114. an be obtained from the U S Postal Service s Publication 25 A Guide to Business Mail Preparation Quiet Zone The bar code structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which extends 4 75 inches from the right edge of the mail piece In addition a minimum quiet zone of 0 040 inch above and below the bar code data must also be provided You must provide sufficient space for this zone Start Stop Code The start and stop codes are referred to as framing bars in POSTNET The start and stop codes are each one tall bar one identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced 244 Telepen with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bar code scanning in a left to right direction only Data Field The bar code data produces a single field of 30 bars for a 5 digit field 50 bars for a 9 digit data field or 60 bars for an 11 digit data field The bars are grouped in sets of five Each set of five bars comprised of two tall bars and three short bars represents one of the five digits of the zip code plus the four digit zip code extension If the Advanced Bar Code is used an additional two digit code is also added to make an 1 1 digit data field Check Digit The sixth tenth or twelfth digit represents the automatic check digit character for the 5 9 or 11 digit data field respectively The check digit is added automatically to verify accurate scanning Telepen
115. an be used within VFU programs The VFU automatically counts one line of elongated characters as two normal character lines 271 Chapter 9 General P Series EVFU Programming Information Paper Runaway Protection e When the VFU is selected but not loaded If a VFU command is sent from the host computer then the printer moves the paper a single line feed only e When the VFU is selected and the memory has been loaded If a channel code is sent from the host which is not a part of the assigned sequence currently in memory then the printer moves the paper a single line feed only Line Spacing The printer can use any line spacing with the VFU The VFU determines the forms length according to the program specifications and the currently selected line spacing Line spacing may be mixed on the same form but should be done with caution to avoid unpredictable results VFU Deselected If VFU is deselected from the control panel the VFU data are ignored and the forms length definition returns to the previously set value The current print position becomes the top of form VFU Load Save Clear One VFU table can be saved in Non Volatile Memory NVM at a time The VFU table format is VFU type lpi and VFU channel data Load Upon printer power up or printer reset a previously saved VFU is loaded if the saved VFU table matches the VFU type Upon loading the VFU is set to the value stored in the VFU table if the
116. ance set is the product of n and the current line spacing Factory default value disables bottom margin The current default value may be set by the operator Setting a new forms length ESC C resets bottom margin to zero This feature is disabled whenever vertical tabs are set The bottom margin can also be selected from the control panel however vertical tabs within the bottom margin zone as set by the control panel are ignored The control code bottom margin setting from the host computer overrides the control panel setting 107 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Skip Over Perforation Cancel ASCII Code ESC O alpha O Code 1B 4F Dec Code 2779 Purpose Resets bottom margin to zero Superscript Subscript Printing ASCII Code ESC 5 Hex Code 1B53n Dec Code 2783n Purpose Selects superscript or subscript printing where 0 to enable superscript printing hex 00 or hex 30 n 1 to enable subscript printing hex 01 or hex 31 Comment Superscript Subscript font prints at one half the normal vertical character height and at twice the normal vertical density When the superscript subscript control code is received all characters are superscript or subscript until reset by the superscript subscript reset control code or printer reset Emphasized print is ignored in the superscript subscript print mode Both superscript and subscript characters can be printed in the sa
117. are canceled The vertical format unit is cleared The current line is set to the top of form position Interface parameters and printer protocol selection are not affected This command resets the horizontal tabs to every eighth character column 94 Expanded Double Wide Print Expanded Double Wide Print ASCII Code ESC W n Hex Code 1B57n Dec Code 2787n Purpose Selects or resets expanded double wide print where n 1 selects expanded print hex 01 or hex 31 n 0 resets expanded print hex 00 or hex 30 Comment When expanded print using ESC W is received all characters are printed double wide until reset by the Expanded Print Reset control code Emulation Reset or DCA Also refer to control code SO and ESC SO Expanded Double Wide Print for one line only Example The following sample illustrates expanded character printing and expanded character printing reset CONTROL CODE ESC W 1 SELECTS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE ESC W O RESETS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only ASCII Code SO ESC SO Hex Code OE 1B 0E Dec Code 14 27 14 Purpose Selects expanded double wide print for one line only Comment This expanded print control code is a line by line print attribute when the SO or ESC SO control code is received the current line is printed double wide and automatically reset This control code can be reset by a paper motion control code LF
118. ate Character Set Select Shift Out ASCII Code SO BS Hex Code OE 08 Dec Code 14 8 NOTE An alternate hex code of 08 ASCII code BS can be assigned as the Alternate Character Set Select control code through printer configuration Purpose Accesses the extended character set in the range of hex AO through FF using codes hex 20 through 7F Comment These codes are used in 7 bit systems as if data bit 8 was set to 1 For example sending code hex 20 accesses the symbol at code point hex AO If a printable symbol is not available at the code point a space is printed Both commands are cancelled by a paper motion command Refer to the character set charts in Appendix D Example EIE 8 E Earle Hir ped Wp E pl LHH kt ys boi eL b4 HELL pepo E L ELE H b HP b amp zltt YSELECTS THE PRIMARY CHARACTER SET 65 Chapter 3 Configuring the XQ Emulation with Control Codes Carriage Return ASCII Code CR Hex Code 00 Dec Code 13 Purpose Positions the logical print head at the left margin resets the memory pointer to the first character position Comment The printer can be configured to perform a carriage return only CR CR only or a carriage return plus a line feed function CR CR LF A CR CR configuration enables underline add delete and edit functions but the host computer must send a separate line feed code to print the data and change the vertical position The character position indicator i
119. ation using host control codes refer to Appendix B PTR SETUP Option 23 Chapter 2 24 Introduction P Series Default Values and States The factory settings for the P Series emulation menu options for an 8 printer are shown in Table 1 Table 1 also lists additional factory settings for parameters provided by the ASCII Emulation formatting menus The EMULATION menu options are described in the User s Guide Host control codes can override many of the settings for these menu options Table 1 P Series Default Settings Characteristic Default Setting Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Character Group Character Set Primary Subset Extended Subset Horizontal DPI Vertical DPI Prop Spacing Italic Print Slashed Zero Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Print Char Set Define CR code Auto LF Define LF code Advanced User Control Code 06 Control Code 08 Bold 10 0 CPI 6 0 LPI Letter Gothic Standard Sets IBM PC ASCII USA Code Page 437 120 DPI 72 DPI Enable Disable Disable 0 characters 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces CHR CR Disable LF LF 8 0 LPI Elongated Disable P Series Default Values and States Table 1 P Series Default Settings continued Characteristic Default Setting Overstrike Select SFCC EVFU Select Alt Set 80 9F SFCC d command PSeries Dbl High FF valid at TOF Text Position Host Command Reset
120. ber of lines given in n If the value of n exceeds the form length commands to move to that tab position are ignored If values of n are not in ascending order the sequence up to and including the out of sequence number is ignored and the rest of the load is processed Skip over perforation is ignored This command always sets channel 0 You can clear channel 0 by sending ESC B NUL See also the channel selection command ESC and the channel loading command ESC b 195 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes 196 7 Super Set Programming Introduction This chapter describes the super set commands Super set commands affect each of the protocols included in the ASCII Emulation regardless of the printer protocol currently active except for the P Series XQ Variant emulation The commands are sent through the host in the input data stream and enact the features described in the following subsections NOTE The super set commands do not affect the P Series XQ Variant emulation The Super Set Commands Each printer protocol uses a unique control code sequence to introduce the super set commands called the Super Set Control Code SSCC Table 43 Super Set Control Codes Protocol ASCII Value Hex Value P Series SFCC SFCC 7C 7D 3B P Series XQ N A N A Serial Matrix ESC ESC 7C 7D 3B Epson FX ESC ESC 7C 7D 3B Proprinter Ill XL ESC ESC 7C 7D 3B
121. c CP 715 311 Latin 9 8859 15 611 Unis 1 Turkish 108 CP 786 400 DEC 256 Greek 612 Code Page 853 109 Arabic 864 401 ELOT 928 Greek 613 INFO Turkish 200 Character Spacing n 240 Inch Character Spacing n 240 Inch ASCII Code SSCC I n uppercase i Hex Code SSCC 49n Dec Code SSCC 73n Purpose Specifies the character spacing in n 240 inch increments where n 001 through 999 three ASCII digits Comment When the n 240 inch character spacing command is received all character printing is at n 240 inch horizontal spacing until a new character spacing is selected Example 55 I 008 specifies a spacing of 30 characters per inch Font Selection ASCII Code SSCCFn1 n2 n3 n4 n5 Hex Code SSCC 46 n1 n2 3B n3 n4 3B n5 Dec Code SSCC 70 n1 59 n2 59 n359 n4 59 n5 Purpose Selects fixed pitch and proportional font attributes with character size specified in terms of typographic points Comment Parameters n1 through n5 are specified as ASCII digit values If a non digit is used in any parameter the value remains unchanged The following paragraphs explain how to set various options using ASCII digit values for each parameter where Parameter n1 identifies a specific typeface Enter the five digit number representing the selected typeface Fixed pitch spacing is used for the Letter Gothic DP Courier NLQ OCR A and OCR B typefaces All others use proportional spacing The standard fonts available are
122. capabilities e Select a printer protocol e Change the page orientation e Define various font attributes including typeface and point size e Select proportional fonts See Chapter 7 Super Set Programming beginning on page 197 for further information on the Super set commands Underline ASCII Code SFCC n Hex Code SFCC2Dn Dec Code SFCC 45n Purpose Enables or disables automatic underlining of all characters where n 0 to disable automatic underlining hex 00 or hex 30 n 1 to enable automatic underlining hex 01 or hex 31 Comment When automatic underline is enabled all characters including spaces are underlined until disabled Example following sample illustrates automatic underlining CONTROL CODE ESC 1 ENABLES AUTOMATIC UNDERLINING CONTROL CODE ESC O DISABLES AUTOMATIC UNDERLINING 56 VFU Commands P Series VFU Commands P Series ASCII Code See the P Series EVFU section in Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting for codes NOTE If the SFCC being used is ESC the PI line must be set high when using the EVFU Purpose Load and execute the VFU Comment See Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting beginning on page 271 for detailed information Vertical Tab ASCII Code VT Hex Code 0B Dec Code 11 Purpose Prints the data in the buffer and advances the paper to the next vertical tab position Comment lf a vertical tab format is defined in the EVFU channel 12 and
123. ccomplished by adding the RESET command as the last command in your setup file This is necessary because the printer caches the active 287 Appendix B 288 The PTR SETUP Commands configuration Rebooting the printer ensures that the desired configuration is correctly read from Non Volatile RAM NOTE While an upload or download is in progress the Front Panel will be unavailable The Configuration Save and Delete commands from the front panel can be blocked by using the Protect Configurations feature This is intended to prevent someone from inadvertently reconfiguring a printer The PTR SETUP commands however will override the protect configurations feature All PTR SETUP commands will be honored regardless of the value of the Protect Configurations feature Operation of the FILE IO Command When a file is opened for writing with the FILE IO CAPTURE filename command the system will allocate RAM for file control blocks and 1 Kbyte for data If the file already exists on the Flash File System and the Overwrite Enable feature in the Flash File System menu is set to disable a warning will be displayed on the front panel After clearing the warning the file data will be printed To overwrite the existing file set the Overwrite Files option to enable Due to the nature of writing to flash any data intended to be stored permanently in flash must first be copied into RAM As a result the ability to manipulate files in the Flash
124. ce an error message Command Line Error Messages are listed in Table 2 on page 27 Forms length can also be set by the control panel when Menu Form Size is enabled The control code forms length setting from the host computer overrides the control panel setting However if the VFU is enabled and loaded this command is ignored Also 0 5 inch increments can be specified For example sending the command SFCC INCHES 7 5 results in a form length setting of 7 1 2 inches 43 Chapter 2 _ Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Forms Length Set Lines ASCII Code SFCC LINES n Purpose Sets the length of a form paper in lines where n 1 through 192 hex 01 through CO to specify the number of lines per page at the current line spacing Comment The forms length is set to the number of lines defined by the quotient of n and the current line spacing so that the units are in inches In LINES mode the maximum form length is 24 inches and n values in excess of 24 inches causes an error message Command Line Error Messages are listed in Table 2 on page 27 If the calculated forms length in lines is not an exact multiple of the target machine dot size the forms length value is adjusted down to the next possible multiple If the VFU is enabled and loaded this command is ignored Form Margins Set ASCII Code SFCC v n1 n2 n3 n4 Hex Code 76 n1 n2 n3 n4 Dec Code 118 n1 n2n3n4 Purp
125. characters include mostly normal printable ASCII characters which require no subset switching and can be entered directly Code 128B Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent an extensive character set 96 ASCII characters and seven control characters The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules Code 128C Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent 100 pairs of numeric digits 00 through 99 and 3 control characters The bars and spaces vary in width from 1 through 4 modules Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules 229 Chapter 7 Codes Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The start code is included in the check digit algorithm NOTE Access for the alternate set of control function characters is by using SO Shift Out hex OE The SO control code identifies the next character as the control function character and must be inserted before each alternate character required The SO character is selectable from the printer s front
126. check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning UCC EAN 128 The UCC EAN 128 bar code structure is shown in Figure 21 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION amp amp i 1 1 UPPER GUARD BAND 5 CAP SERERE 1 QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET ZONE CODE CODE zone 1 HEIGHT EI J LOWER GUARD BAND Era OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 21 UCC EAN 128 Structure UCC EAN 128 uses the same bar code and character set as Code 128 However in UCC EAN 128 the Function 1 character FNC1 immediately follows the start code The FNC1 character has been reserved exclusively for UCC EAN 128 The UCC EAN 128 data structure requires an Application Identifier AI at the beginning of bar code data Each AI determines the format and length of the data which follows See Table 73 for more detail Table 73 UCC EAN 128 Application Identifiers UCC EAN 128 Application Identifier Content Format Al 00 Serial Shipping Container Code n2 n18 01 Shipping Container Code n2 n14 02 Item Num of Goods Within Another Unit n2 n14 10 Batch or Lot Number n2 an 20 11 Production Date YYMMDD n2 n6 13 Packaging Date YYMMDD n2 n6 15 Sell By Date Quality YYMMDD n2 n6 17 Expiration Date Safet
127. cific syntax is required to complete the program statement i e Horizontal Tab set Vertical Tab set clear If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that are defined in the control code description unpredictable results may occur Special Function Control Code Control Code Header A Special Function Control Code SFCC is used to extend the control code protocol The SFCC is the control code introducer or header it is the first input in the sequence of parameters The general control code sequence is SFCC parameter 1 parameter 2 parameter n P Series codes can use any value from 1 through 255 hex 01 through hex FF as control code introducers For example bold print can be enabled in the P Series protocol using any of the following control code introducers ASCII SOH Hex 01 47 Dec 171 ETX G 03 47 371 ESC G 1B 47 27 71 G 5E 47 94 71 G 7E 47 126 71 NOTE The SFCC has been set to ESC for all examples Command Line Command Line Print format print mode or international language selection can be controlled by a longer sequence known as a Command Line Command Lines are string type commands placed between complete lines of text and affect the text which follows The protocol has six Command Lines PMODE OSET PSET LPI LINES and INCHES Each of these Command Lines is discussed in this chapter under the appropriate Control Code function For example the form length in inc
128. cleared The current line is set to the top of form position Interface parameters and printer protocol selection are not affected 40 Expanded Double Wide Print Expanded Double Wide Print ASCII Code SFCC W n Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example CONTROL CODE SFCC57n SFCC87n Selects or resets expanded double wide print n 1 selects expanded print hex 01 or hex 31 n 0 resets expanded print hex 00 or hex 30 When expanded print using SFCC W is received all characters are printed double wide until reset by the expanded print reset control code or printer reset The following sample illustrates expanded character printing and expanded character printing reset ESC W 1 SELECTS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE ESC W RESETS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only ASCII Code SFCC k Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example CONTROL CODE k SELECTS SFCC 6B SFCC 107 Selects expanded double wide print for one line only This expanded print control code is a line by line print attribute When the SFCC k control code is received the current line is printed double wide and then automatically reset This control code can be reset by a paper motion control code LF VT CR etc SFCC printer reset CAN or SFCC W double wide print The following sample illustrates Expanded Print for one line only For another e
129. ct Printer ASCII Code ESC Q 22 Hex Code 1B 51 16 Dec Code 278122 Purpose Stops the printer from processing data received from the host computer Discussion This code is for diagnostic use it instructs the printer to stop processing data received from the host system In order to resume processing data the printer must be reset from the host system Emphasized Print ASCII Code ESC E Hex Code 1B 45 Dec Code 27 69 Purpose Selects emphasized character print format Comment When the emphasized print control code is received all characters are printed in emphasized print until reset by the emphasized print reset control code or printer reset Emphasized print is ignored during superscript or subscript printing and when 15 20 cpi characters have been selected Example The following sample illustrates emphasized character printing CONTROL CODE ESC E SELECTS EMPHASIZED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE ESC F CANCELS EMPHASIZED CHARACTER PRINTING Emphasized Print Reset ASCII Code ESC F Hex Code 1 46 Dec Code 27 40 Purpose Resets emphasized character printing Comment The emphasized print reset control code only resets the emphasized print character attribute Example See Emphasized Print for an example of Emphasized Print Reset 128 Expanded Double Wide Print Expanded Double Wide Print ASCII Code ESC W n Hex Code 1B57n Dec Code 2787n Purpose Selects or resets expanded double wide
130. d Load X Undefined 0 or 1 1 High 0 Low 276 Clearing the EVFU Memory The following actions reset clear the EVFU memory e Sending only the start load code e Sending a start load code followed immediately by end load code e Asecond start load code is received resulting in reinitialization of the EVFU This allows the host data to be restarted When the EVFU memory is cleared the forms length returns to the previously set value and the current print position becomes the top of form TOF Relative Line Slewing Relative Line Slewing Another method of moving paper using the PI signal line results in vertical slews of a specified number of lines within the form relative to the current print line rather than slewing to a specific line For this to occur three criteria must be met e The PI signal line must be enabled and set high e Data bit 5 must be 1 set and e The EVFU must be the selected Vertical Format Unit The Slew Relative configuration and the state of data bits 1 through 4 determine the number of lines slewed as described in Table 79 Note that the state of data bit 5 is the difference between line slewing and using the interface lines as EVFU channel codes As long as the EVFU is selected this type of vertical paper motion occurs regardless of whether the EVFU memory is loaded or not If the Double High for One Line attribute is active n 1 lines are slewed rather than n li
131. d beyond the right margin are ignored The physical tab position is the product of n and the current cell width 1 pitch excluding double wide After the tabs are set HT moves the logical print head to the next tab stop Sending ESC initializes the printer and resets the tabs to every eighth character column which is the default In proportional mode the size of 10 cpi characters determines tab positions The following example illustrates how to set horizontal tabs CONTROL CODE ESC D CHR 4 CHR C10 CHR COD SETS TAB STOPS AT COLUMNS 4 AND 10 CONTROL CODE HT ACCESSES THE TAB STOPS AS FOLLOWS COLUMN 4 COLUMN 10 175 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Initialize Printer ASCII Code ESC 2 Hex Code 1B 40 Dec Code 2764 Purpose Resets all print related parameters to their power up configuration values Comment Print mode line spacing international language selection margins form length skip over perforation and character pitch are reset to their power up configuration Character by character and line by line attributes are canceled The vertical format unit is cleared The current line is set to the top of form position Interface parameters and printer protocol selection are not affected This command resets the horizontal tabs to every eighth character column Italic Printing ASCII Code ESC 4 Hex Code 1B 34 Dec Code 2752 Purpose Turns on italic characte
132. de ESC n1 NUL n2 n3 n4 n5 Code 1B 5B 4B n1 00 n2 n3 n4 n5 Dec Code 27 91 75 0 2 n3 n4 n5 Purpose Sets the printer s initial condition Discussion This command causes the printer to reset and defines the configuration that will be loaded to the printer during the reset Several variables must be specified to define the load configuration as described below NOTE An ESC K code can occur at any place in the datastream and is acted upon immediately All numerical parameters are in the hex 00 through FF range unless stated otherwise Only specified parameters are supported Other values may be ignored or cause unpredictable results and should be avoided ni The value of n1 defines which of the following n bytes will be included in the command line as shown in Table 27 Table 27 n1 Values n1 Hex Value Function 1 One byte follows n2 3 Three bytes follow n2 n3 and n4 4 Four bytes follow n2 n3 n4 and n5 NOTE Specifying any value for n1 other than 1 3 or 4 may cause unpredictable results and should be avoided n2 The 2 digit hexadecimal value for n2 defines the load configuration for the printer The Proprinter IIl XL supports six values for this parameter 00 01 04 05 254 and 255 hex 00 01 04 05 FE and FF Any other value will be ignored If any of the six supported values is entered for the n2 parameter then the printer will reset to the factory default configuration
133. de SSCC 83 n1 59 n2 59 n3 59 n4 59 n5 59 n6 59 Purpose Selects fixed pitch and proportional font attributes with character size specified in terms of width and height in inches Comment Parameters n1 through n6 are specified as ASCII digit values If a non digit is used in any parameter the value remains unchanged The following paragraphs explain how to set various options using ASCII digit values for each parameter where Parameter n1 identifies a specific typeface Enter the five digit number representing the selected typeface Fixed pitch spacing is used for the Letter Gothic DP Courier NLQ OCR A and OCR B typefaces All others use proportional spacing 202 TrueType Font Selection The standard fonts available are Courier 4493950 Letter Gothic 93777 OCR A 90993 OCR B 91409 and CG Times 92500 Parameter n2 is a 1 digit bold flag n2 0 disable bold 1 enable bold Parameter n3 selects a 1 digit slant flag Slant is similar to italic but also offers a backward slant n3 0 disable slant 1 right slant 2 left slant Parameter n4 selects a 3 digit symbol set Table 48 n4 Value Symbol Sets Printer Protocol n4 Symbol Set Proprinter XL 000 Code Page 437 001 Code Page 850 All others 000 IBM PC 001 Multinational 002 ECMA 94 Latin 1 003 DEC Multinational 004 OCR A 005 OCR B Parameter n5 selects a 4 digit character width in 1 480 inch units
134. densed Print 91 Delete cousine 92 Elongated Double High Print One Line Only 92 Elongated Double High Print 93 Emphasized Print essen enne 93 Emphasized Print Reset 94 Emulation ener 94 Expanded Double Wide Print eee 95 Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only 95 Extended Character 96 Table of Contents Extended Character Set Cancel Primary Character Set Select sss 96 Form E660 e iet fpe eret ERR drea anaes 97 Forms Length Set Inches 97 Forms Length Set Lines 98 Form Margins Selge 98 Horizontal Tab etre al eee 99 Horizontal T3b S6t are d cc esci educa 99 Lirie Eeed 100 Line Feed n 216 Inch One Line 100 Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 101 Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 1 101 Line Spacing 7 72 Inich iuc tee ett trente 102 Line Spacing n 72 Inch sss 102 Line Spacing n 216 Inch sess 103 OVerscoring xat eoe tb ent fetis 103 P
135. described below GUARD BAND 1 XE mx QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET A eres E OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 6 Australian 4 State Structure SR SC POSITION amp e lt lt a Se ae Soe 1 T Quiet Zone Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin and end in a blank area The quiet zones should be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start and stop bars identify the orientation of the bar code The start bar consists of an ascender bar and is positioned at the left most end of the bar code The stop bar consists of a full height bar and is positioned at the right most end of the bar code adjacent to the check digit Data Field The first two characters of the data field is the FCC code The maximum length for each FCC code is described in Table 64 Table 64 FCC Codes and Maximum Bar Code Lengths FCC Valid Data Maximum Length 11 87 45 or 92 Any 840 59 A Z a z 0 9 space 8 5 44 62 A Z a z 0 9 space 8 10 For example if 1101234567 is specified as the bar code data 11 indicates the FCC code and 01234567 is the 8 digit data field Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpreta
136. e Density Bit Image Mode Quadruple Density ASCII Code ESC Z n1 n2 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where 1B 5A n1 n2 27 90 n1 n2 Selects Quadruple Density Bit Image graphics n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment Example For detailed information see the Bit Image section in Chapter 8 The printed density in this mode is 120 dpi horizontal and 72 dpi vertical if selected when Letter Gothic print mode is active The following example produces quadruple density graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image Mode example Note that the amount of data must be quadrupled for quadruple density the data is used 108 times rather than 27 QUAD DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS Bold Print Set ASCII Code ESC G Hex Code 1B47 Dec Code 27 71 Purpose Selects bold character printing Comment When the bold character printing control code is received all characters are printed in bold until reset by the bold print reset control code or printer reset Bold Print is the same as printing double strike Example The following sample illustrates bold character printing CONTROL CODE ESC G SELECTS BOLD CHARACTER PRINTING FOR EXAMPLE AaBbCcDdEeFf
137. e Feed n 216 Inch ie attore 177 Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 lIpi sseeese 178 Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 lpi sseese 178 Line Spacing 7 72 Inch s tee tre t Rd eti Dei 179 Line Spacing n 72 Inch ssssssssssseeeeeeenes 179 Line Spacing n 216 Inch seen 180 Make Hex 80 9F Control 180 Make Hex 80 9F Printable eese 180 Master Print Select 182 Paper Out Detection Enable essere 182 Paper Out Detection 183 Pass Bit 7 from Host aserria ente oed 183 Printer Deselect io te heh Unus 183 Printer Selecti tete au e 184 Reassign Graphics 184 Remove Downloaded Characters 184 Select Graphics Mode sess 185 Select Italic Character Set 186 Select 9 Pin Graphics 186 186 Select Deselect Proportional 187 Select Serif or Sans Serif 187 Select User Defined
138. e equal Either value can be used in your program expression The density dpi remains the same under this setting x and y represent the resolutions of the particular printer Table 24 Print Mode and Character Pitches ESC Xmn Characters Per Inch value of n value of m Print Mode DP NLQ HS HS HS OCR A OCR B NLQ2 NLG2 0 30 1 31 2 32 3 33 4 34 5 35 6 36 7 37 8 38 0 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 81 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 2 32 13 13 13 13 13 B 13 13 3 33 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 4 34 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 5 35 20 17 20 20 20 17 17 The hex values shown i e 0 and 30 are equal Either value can be used in your program expression The value of m is represented by the font choice line NOTE When using the Multinational character set in OCR A or OCR B print mode a unique character set is used 105 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Example sample printout below shows a number of different print modes and pitch selections PRINT MODE AND OR PITCH SELECTION ESC Xmn SELECTS THE PRINT MODE LETTER GOTHIC COURIER OR OCR AND CHARACTER PITCH IN CHARACTERS PER INCH CPI PRINTING IN GOTHIC FONT PRINTED IN GOTHIC 10 CPI PRINTED IN GOTHIC 12 CPI PRINTED IN GOTHIC 13 CPI PRINTED IN GOTHIC 15 CPI PRINTED IN GOTHIC 17 CPI PRINTING IN COURIER FONT PRINTED IN COURIER 10 CPI PRINTED IN COURIER 1
139. e for the Epson expanded character sets and the Epson 0437 PC character sets Table 37 Character Set Print Mode Support Letter Character Set Courier Gothic Notes 0437 PC Character Set X X 0850 PC Multilingual X X OCR A OCR B N A N A OCR is 10 cpi only Epson Set ASCII USA Epson Set French Epson Set German Epson Set English UK Epson Set Danish I Epson Set Swedish Epson Set Italian Epson Set Spanish I Epson Set Japanese Epson Set Norwegian Epson Set Danish Il Epson Set Spanish II Epson Set Latin American I Epson Set French Canadian X X X X 0X 0X X X X X Epson Set Latin American II 156 Control Code Index Control Code Index The following index lists the control codes by function and lists the ASCII mnemonic and page number NOTE Some control code functions can also be selected at the operator panel Produces non Epson behavior in your printer FUNCTION Vertical Motion and Print Execution Carriage Return Form Feed Line Feed Line Feed n 216 Inch Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi Line Spacing 7 72 Inch t Line Spacing n 72 Inch Line Spacing n 216 Inch Paper Out Detection Disable Paper Out Detection Enable Select Vertical Tab Channel Set Forms Length by Lines Set Forms Length in Inches Set Ver
140. e n 216 inch line spacing control code is received all line feeds following are at n 216 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing the remainder is added to the next paper motion command Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript overlapping lines may occur Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap Example The following example illustrates n 216 inch line spacing Control code ESC 3 50 sets line spacing at 50 216 inch increments for all subsequent lines until reset or another spacing is selected Margins Left Right Set ASCII Code ESC X n1 n2 Hex Code 1 58 n1 2 Dec Code 27 88 n1 n2 Purpose Sets the left n1 and right n2 margins n1 and n2are the margin positions in character columns which are based on the current cpi They have a range of 1 through 255 Any value that sets the right margin beyond the form width is ignored where if n1 0 the left margin is unaffected if n2 0 the right margin is unaffected 140 Overscoring Overscoring ASCII Code ESC n Hex Code 1B5Fn
141. e terminator code however we recommend that you place the line spacing code at the start or end of the data line After the line is printed at the new line spacing the default line spacing is automatically reselected THE 8 LPI CONTROL CODE O6CHEXD SELECTS 8_LPI R OSANG FOR ONE LINE ONL AND THEN AUTOMATICALLY RESETS TO THE PREVIOUS LINE SPACING 70 Plot Even Dot P Series XQ High Density Graphics Plot Even Dot P Series XQ High Density Graphics ASCII Code EOT Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example 04 4 Selects even dot plot mode to print dots in even numbered dot columns to produce high density plotting The Even Dot Plot control code can occur anywhere in the data line before the line terminator It defines certain data between the next and last paper motion commands as even dot plot data These data are plotted at 60 by 72 dots per inch When this mode is exited the print mode and attributes last selected remain active A detailed description of plotting can be found in Chapter 8 Graphics This command can occur anywhere in the datastream and is acted upon immediately affecting the entire current print line CONTROL CODE 04 HEX SELECTS EVEN DOT PLOT COMBINED WITH ODD DOT PLOT FOR HIGH DENSITY GRAPHICS TWO LINES OF QQaQaQaQQQQQ AS THE DATA RESULTS IN THE FOLLOWING DOT PATTERN 71 Chapter 3 Configuring the XQ Emulation with Control Codes Plot Odd Dot P Series XQ Normal Dens
142. easurement indicating the vertical spacing between successive lines of text For example 8 Ipi is 8 printed lines per vertical inch lines per minute A measurement indicating the number of lines printed per minute Ipm usually defines the speed at which text prints See RAM N Nonvolatile memory stores variables that must be preserved when the printer is turned off such as configuration parameters and printer usage statistics Nonvolatile memory is preserved because RAM is housed on the controller board which contains an independent battery operated power supply When printer power is turned off the battery supplies the power needed to keep stored data active Nonvolatile memory also includes storage on disk 295 Appendix D NOVRAM Acronym of NonVolatile Random Access Memory See also nonvolatile memory O OCR Optical Character Recognition is the process by which a machine reads characters printed in a special standardized font Data are read by a photoelectric optical scanner and recorded on magnetic tape or disk OCR A and OCR B are two widely used fonts P Parity check Parity checking is the addition of non data bits to data resulting in the number of 1 bits being either always even or always odd Parity is used to detect transmission errors Parity represents the value in the check digit of the received or transmitted data Parsing Parsing is the process of separating a programming statement into basic un
143. ed Double Wide Print Expanded Double Wide Print 1 line Overscoring Print Mode Pitch Selection ASCII CODE PAGE FF 43 LF 45 VT 57 BS 30 CR 32 SFCC INCHES n f 43 SFCC LINES n 44 SFCC v 44 SFCC 2 46 SFCC LPI n SFCC 0 47 SFCC LPI n ACK 47 SFCC f SFCC 1 48 SFCC A 49 SFCC 3 50 DLE through US 57 SFCC 31 SFCC j 31 SFCC H 31 SFCC h 38 BS SFCC wn 39 SFCC E 40 SFCC F 40 SFCC W 41 SFCC k 41 SFCC n 50 SFCC X mn 52 SFCC PMODE n SFCC nq Control Code Reference Index FUNCTION Print Attributes continued Superscript Subscript Printing Superscript Subscript Printing Reset Underline Graphics Plot Even Dot High Density Plot Odd Dot Normal Density Other Functions Bell Character Set Select Characters 80 9F Control Codes Characters 80 9F Printable Symbols Character Set Select ECMA Extended Character Set Select International Languages Emulation Reset Extended Character Set Extended Character Set Cancel Primary Set Select Super Set Commands ASCII CODE SFCC Sn SFCCT SFCC EOT SFCC d ENQ SFCC e BEL SFCC I xyz SFCC 7 SFCC 6 SFCC OSET n SFCC Rn SFCC PSET n SFCC SO SFCC SO SFCC SFCC 4 Sl SFCC SI SFCC o SFCC 5 SFCC 29 42 56 Chapter 2 _ Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Backspace ASCII Code BS Hex Code 08 Dec Code 8 Purpose Moves the logical print head to the left one character space toward t
144. edish 6 English UK Italian Italian Y Dutch Spanish Spanish 8 French Japanese Japanese 9 Spanish French Canadian French Canadian 10 Italian Latin American Dutch 11 Turkish Finnish 12 Japanese Swiss po LL Ln oO ON OO KR C N currently undefined 37 Chapter 2 _ Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Comment The international character set can also be selected from the control panel The control code setting overrides the control panel character set selection Values other than those selectable from Table 7 are ignored Example The following example illustrates international character selection using the IBM PC character set CONTROL CODE ESC R 5 SELECTS THE SWEDISH CHARACTER SET SHOWN BENEATH THE USA ASCII CHARACTERS ABCDL 1 t 12 ABCDA A o a Elongated Double High Print One Line Only ASCII Code SFCC h BS Hex Code SFCC 68 08 Dec Code SFCC 104 8 Purpose Selects elongated double high character printing for one line only Elongated characters are approximately double height but standard width Comment The elongated character control code is a line by line print attribute when the control code is received one entire line of elongated characters is printed and then automatically reset When configured for double high print P Series control code BS hex 08 also selects elongated character printing for a single line When using this featu
145. ent line becomes the first line of the form and the form length set becomes the current forms length Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of the form are ignored Forms length is defined in inches therefore subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command The maximum forms length is 21 inches All larger values are ignored When forms length is changed by the ESC C NUL sequence the bottom margin is set to zero If the product of lines and line spacing forms length is not an exact multiple of the printer dot resolution the value is adjusted down until forms length and dot resolution distance match The current paper position becomes top of form If the form length is set smaller than the line spacing a line feed moves the current line spacing a form feed advances paper position to the next top of form position Forms length can also be set through the control panel The control code forms length setting from the host computer overrides the control panel setting 131 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Forms Length Set Lines ASCII Code ESC C n Hex Code 1B43n Dec Code 2767n Purpose Sets the length of a form paper in lines where n 1 through 192 hex 01 through hex CO to specify the number of lines per page at the current line spacing Comment forms length set becomes the current forms length Forms length is defined in inches th
146. ent standard alphanumeric characters Each wide or narrow bar or space is one element each character in the data field has nine elements The structure is three wide elements bars or spaces out of the nine total elements which compose one character Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol 225 Chapter 7 Codes Check Digit The optional modulo 43 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning Table 66 Code 39 Character Set ASCII CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39 NUL U SP Space V E W SOH A A A A a A STX B B B B b B ETX C C C c C EOT D D D D d D ENQ E E E E e E ACK F amp F F f F BEL G IG G G g G BS H H H H h H HT 1 l l LF J IJ J J j J VT K IK K K k K FF L L L L L CR M M M m M SO N N N n N SI 0 O O o O DLE P 0 0 P P p P DC1 Q 1 1 Q Q q Q DC2 R 2 2 R R r R DC3 5 3 3 S S S 5 DC4 T 4 4 T T t T NAK U 5 5 U U u U SYN V 6 6 V V V ETB W 7 7 W W w W CAN X 8 8 X X X X EM Y 9 9 Y Y y SUB z IZ Z Z 2 Z ESC 96A i YK P FS lt G L GS 96 96H 9 M R RS D gt l N S US 9eJ __ DEL 9e T YX SN WL NOTE Character pairs M N and P through Y are reserved for fu
147. entifier the mod 10 check digit is the sixteenth byte in the data field UPC A The modulo 10 data field check digit for both SSCC 18 and SCC 14 is printed in the bar code as the second half of the last number pair using subset C It is displayed in the human readable data field as the twentieth byte for SSCC 18 or the sixteenth byte for SCC 14 ASCII Emulation automatically calculates the modulo 10 check digit for SSCC 18 if only 17 data digits are provided following the application identifier of 00 UPC A The UPC A bar code structure is shown in Figure 22 and described below POS I CODE CODE STOR CODE e pee QUIET RIGHT DATA QUIET ZONE FIELD ZONE NUMBER SYSIEM S c MEA c AUT CHARACTER DIGIT HECK DIGIT FIELD NUMBER SYSTEM OPTIONAL READABLE CHES CHARACTE CHARACTER FIELD DATA FIELD Figure 22 UPC A Structure Quiet Zone Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin and end in a blank area You are responsible for providing sufficient space minimum of seven modules on the form for the quiet zones The number system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone Start Center Stop Codes The start center stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of the bar code These codes are automatically provided Number System Character The number system character field allows you to provide a code
148. er emulation select ASCII Emulation from the EMULATION menu and P Series XQ from the Printer Protocol menu as described in the User s Guide The P Series XQ emulation provides many configurable parameters The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 12 You can modify the emulation parameter values in two ways e The P Series XQ host control codes An extensive set of P Series XQ control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the P Series XQ control codes printer configuration menus You can modify a subset of the P Series XQ emulation parameters using the control panel keys and LCD as described in the User s Guide Control codes sent from a host system generally override previous settings that result from the configuration menus NOTE Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to the printer s NVRAM memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the User s Guide To save the configuration using host control codes refer to Appendix B PTR SETUP Option 59 Chapter 3 60 Introduction The emulation s response to several of the control codes depends on the configuration For example upon receipt of the carriage return control code the emulation will eithe
149. er weight used in this sentence A value between 0 and 256 that defines the location of a character within a character set Two or more bytes that instruct the printer to perform a special function The first character in the sequence is a Special Function Control Character SFCC which alerts the printer that the string is a command sequence See also SFCC A font attribute referring to a typeface with a smaller than normal character width but no change to character height characters per inch a measurement of monospaced fonts indicating the horizontal character density For example 10 cpi is 10 characters produced in a one inch horizontal space Decipoint Default Diagnostic Disable Emulation Enable Escape sequence Expanded False Family or type Fixed pitch fonts Font D One tenth of a point A unit of measurement equal to 1 720 inch See also point A value parameter attribute or option assigned by a program or system when another is not specified by the user Pertains to the detection and isolation of printer malfunctions or mistakes To deactivate or set to OFF E Refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of another printer language or protocol To activate or set to ON Two or more bytes that describe a specific printer control function In an escape sequence the first byte is always the ASCII ESC character See also command sequence SFCC A font e
150. erefore subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command The forms length is set to the number of lines defined by the quotient of n and the current line spacing so that the units are in inches The forms length set by n becomes the current forms length If the calculated forms length in lines is not an exact multiple of the target machine dot size the forms length value is adjusted down to the next possible multiple When forms length is changed by the ESC C sequence the bottom margin is set to zero The current paper position becomes top of form If the form length is set smaller than the line spacing a line feed moves the current line spacing a form feed advances paper position to the next top of form position Forms length can also be set through the control panel The control code forms length setting from the host computer overrides the control panel setting Horizontal Tab ASCII Code HT Hex Code 09 Dec Code 9 Purpose Moves the logical printhead right to the next horizontal tab stop Comment Power on default horizontal tabs are set at every eighth character If there are no horizontal tabs set or the logical printhead is located at the last character column the code is ignored and no movement occurs Horizontal tabs are stored as a relative position therefore character pitch changes change horizontal tab positions See the Horizontal Tab Set control code section to set new tab position
151. eries Emulation with Control Codes Line Spacing n 216 Inch ASCII Code SFCC Code 33 Dec Code 51 Purpose Specifies the line spacing at n 216 inch increments where 1 through 255 hex 01 through hex FF Comment When the n 216 inch line spacing control code is received all line feeds following are at n 216 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing the remainder is added to the next paper motion command Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript overlapping lines may occur Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap Example following example illustrates n 216 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC 3 50 SETS LINE SPACING AT 50 216 INCH INCREMENTS FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED Overscoring ASCII Code SFCC n Hex Code SFCC5Fn Dec Code SFCC 95 n Purpose Enables or disables automatic overscoring of all characters where n 0 to disable automatic overscoring hex 00 or hex 30 n 1 to enable automatic overscoring hex 01
152. ese characters do not print when double high printing is in effect If Superscript Subscript is combined with Double High ESC w printing only Double High printing occurs Example The following sample illustrates superscript and subscript printing CONTROL CODE ESC S 0 SELECTS SUPERSCRIPT A2 B2 C2 CONTROL CODE ESC S 1 SELECTSsussceretr 3lugx749prEc CONTROL CODE ESC T CANCELS SUPERSCRIPT SUBSCRIPT PRINTING Superscript and Subscript Printing Cancel ASCII Code ESC T Hex Code 1B54 Dec Code 2784 Purpose Cancels superscript and or subscript printing as set by ESC S n 193 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Underline ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B2Dn Dec Code 2745n Purpose Turns automatic underlining on and off where n NUL or 0 hex 00 or hex 30 to turn off underlining n SOH or 1 hex 01 or hex 31 to turn on underlining Comment Spaces are underlined but graphics and grey scale characters are not Example The following sample illustrates underlining CONTROL CODE ESC 1 ENABLES AUTOMATIC UNDERLINING CONTROL CODE ESC O DISABLES AUTOMATIC UNDERLINING Unidirectional Printing 1 Line ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B3C Dec Code 27 60 Purpose Causes printing to occur from left to right for one line only TComment The printer ignores this command Unidirectional Printing Set Reset ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B55n Dec Code 2785n Pu
153. et for the selected character set Table 20 Table 18 Character Set Select x x Character Set 0 hex 30 IBM PC 1 hex 31 Multinational 2 hex 32 ECMA Latin 1 3 hex 33 DEC Multinational 86 Character Set Select Table 19 International Language Select y X 0 hex 30 x 1 hex 31 x z 2 hex 32 X 3 hex 33 Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Multinational 0 hex 30 ASCII USA ASCII USA ASCII USA ASCII USA 1 hex 31 French EBCDIC German French 2 hex 32 German Swedish German 3 hex 33 English UK Danish English UK 4 hex 34 Danish Norwegian Norwegian Danish 5 hex 35 Swedish Finnish Swedish 6 hex 36 Italian English UK Italian 7 hex 37 Spanish Dutch Spanish 8 hex 38 Japanese French Japanese 9 hex 39 French Canadian Spanish French Canadian 10 hex 3A Latin American Italian Dutch 11 hex 3B Norwegian Turkish Finnish 12 hex Danish Il Japanese Swiss 13 hex 3D Spanish ll 14 hex Latin American ll Table 20 Extended Character Set Select z X z 0 hex 30 X 1 hex 31 X 2 hex 32 3 hex 33 E IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Multinational 0 hex 30 IBM PC 0437 Mult Extended Set Barcode 10 cpi DEC Mult Ext Set 1 hex 31 IBM PC 0850 Mult DP 10 cpi 2 hex 32 Mult DP 12 cpi 3 hex 33 Mult NLQ 10 cpi 4 hex 34 Greek DP 10 cpi 5 hex 35 Greek DP 12 cpi 6 hex 36 Greek NLQ 10 cpi 7
154. f Move paper out after printing one page and wait for it to be torn off 3 Peel Off Move paper out after printing one page and wait for it to be peeled Other values of n disable peel off mode 4 Paper Cut Enable paper cut command which cuts after printing the page Media Sensor ASCII Code SSCC s n Hex Code SSCC 73 Dec Code 55 115 where n Number of sensor to enable one ASCII digit in range 1 through 7 n 0 Disable label sensor s Off Line ASCII Code SSCC U Hex Code SSCC 55 Dec Code SSCC 85 Purpose Takes the printer off line 211 Chapter 7 _ The Super Set Commands Paper Cut ASCII Code SSCC t n Hex Code SSCC 74 Dec Code SSCC 116 Table 55 Paper Cut n Value ASCII Meaning 0 Disable cut after printing the page 1 Enable cut after printing the page Paper Feed Shift ASCII Code SSCC E n Hex Code SSCC 45 2D n Dec Code SSCC 69 45 n Purpose Moves the paper off the default feed shift distance in 1 100 inches The brackets around the symbol indicate it is optional do not use these brackets in the command where moves down No moves up hundredths of inches to move the paper off the default feed shift range 000 through 200 All other values are ignored Paper Length ASCII Code SSCC p n1 n2 Hex Code SSCC 70 n1 3B n2 Dec Code SSCC 112 n159 n2 where n2 paper length four ASCII digits Table 56
155. fer The space character hex 20 is used to skip characters in the print buffer that are not to be replaced and similar to underlining or deleting the new characters are inserted in the appropriate positions Table 13 illustrates the edit mode Note that the editing function replaces characters it cannot be used to print the same character twice double strike in the same location Use the DEL code hex 7F to make a character blank NOTE In order for edit mode to work correctly the protocol must be configured for a carriage return only If configured for a carriage return and a line feed the contents of the buffer are printed upon receipt of the CR code disabling the editing function Table 13 CR Edit Mode Example Enter in Print Buffer Printed Result Example 1 AAABBBCCC CR AAABDBCCB SSSSDSSSB LF Example 2 ABCDEF CR ABCDEF ___ CR Key S Space hex 20 LF Line Feed hex OA CR Carriage Return hex OD NUL Code NUL hex 00 is ignored by the printer and can be used as a fill character however it can not be used to add blank spaces since it is not a space character 63 Chapter 3 Configuring the XQ Emulation with Control Codes Control Code Index The following index lists the control codes by function and lists the ASCII mnemonic and page number FUNCTION ASCII CODE Paper Motion Form Feed FF Line Feed LF Vertical Tab VT Print Attributes Plot Even Dot EOT Plot Odd Dot
156. fonts cannot be printed in double wide T Like the Epson FX 1050 this control code doubles the character width Unlike the Epson FX 1050 however this code does not double the inter character spacing The formulas for total character spacing are as follows Epson FX 1050 2 char 1 dot space Epson Emulation 2 char 1 dot space Example following sample illustrates double wide character printing CONTROL CODE ESC W 1 SELECTS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE ESC W RESETS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING Double Wide Print 1 Line Double Wide Print 1 Line ASCII Code SO ESC SO Hex Code OE 1B OE Dec Code 14 27 14 Purpose Selects double wide print for one line only Comment This control code is a line by line print attribute when SO or ESC SO is received the characters on the current line print twice as wide then automatically reset t This control code is cancelled by the DC4 code or by a CR code as in the Epson FX 1050 It is also cancelled by a paper motion control code LF VT etc as in the IBM Proprinter III XL T Like the Epson FX 1050 this control code doubles the character width Unlike the Epson FX 1050 however this code does not double the inter character spacing The formulas for total character spacing are as follows Epson FX 1050 2 char 1 dot space Epson Emulation 2 char 1 dot space Example The following sample illustrates double wide print for one line only
157. ft the image up n thousandths of inches to shift the image vertically range 0000 through 1000 215 Chapter 7 _ The Super Set Commands Printer Protocol Select ASCII Code SSCC P n Code SSCC 50n Dec Code SSCC 80n Purpose Selects changes printer protocol Comment When the emulation receives this command a software reset is performed as if the emulation were powered up in the corresponding protocol Table 59 Printer Protocol Select n Value hex Protocol n 00 or 30 P Series n 01 or 31 P Series XQ n 02 32 Serial Matrix n 03 or 33 Proprinter Ill XL 04 or 34 If P Series XQ is selected then you cannot use this command to exit the protocol NOTE The printer protocol may also be selected from the control panel Software Page Eject ASCII Code SSCC J Hex Code SSCC 4A Dec Code SSCC 74 Purpose Performs a page eject through software This function is identical to a page eject executed via the control panel if available on your printer 216 Software Page Eject Bar Codes A bar code is a graphic representation of alphanumeric characters The ASCII Emulation bar codes are listed below with detailed bar code information and examples provided on the referenced pages All parameters must be separated by a semicolon unless noted otherwise Throughout this chapter actual commands required for input are shown exactly as they m
158. g If configuration Cfg was not previously saved the operator panel will display an error message and the current configuration will be kept SAVE Cig Cfg must be 1 8 This command will save the current configuration as configuration Cfg If Cfg is not in the range of 1 8 the command is ignored POWERUP Cfg Sets the power up configuration to Cfg and loads Configuration Cfg Cfg can be any value from 0 8 where 0 is the factory default PRINT Cfg Print Configuration Cfg Cfg can be a number 1 8 or one of four pre defined configurations The four non numeric configurations are requested using the first character for the CURRENT FACTORY POWERUP or ALL configuration s 284 Commands Table 80 PTR SETUP Commands continued Command Sub Command Parameter Description CONFIG DELETE Cig Deletes Configuration number Cfg Cfg must be in the range of 1 8 UPLOAD Port Cfg This command uploads the configuration stored in location Cfg to the port specified by Port Port must either be 1284 or SERIAL Cfg may be 1 8 or ALL DOWNLOAD Cig This command saves the configuration data that follows as configuration Cfg Cfg must be 1 8 or END RESET Reboots the printer LP MODE n a Protocol Protocol must be 0 4 This command resets the software protocol and is selected as follows 0 P Series 1 P Series XQ 2 Serial Matrix 3 Propri
159. ge page orientation The emulation can print in four different clockwise orientations Portrait 0 Inverse Landscape 90 Inverse Portrait 180 and Landscape 270 The following table shows how to set or change the page orientation Table 50 Page Orientation n Value hex Page Orientation n 2 0 or 30 Portrait 09 n 1or31 Landscape 270 n 2or32 Inverse Portrait 180 n 30r33 Inverse Landscape 90 End the syntax with a line terminator such as a line feed or carriage return Different orientations cannot be present on the same physical page When this command is sent to the emulation a form feed is enacted on the current physical page After the form feed is issued form length and form width revert to the default power up value Page orientation may also be selected from the control panel The following subsections describe portrait and landscape orientation 207 Chapter 7 _ The Super Set Commands Portrait Portrait refers to vertical page orientation where the height of a page is greater than its width The top edge of the image is parallel to the leading edge of the paper Figure 1 is an example of portrait orientation Leading Edge The top edge of the image is parallel to the leading edge of the paper 11 Inches 8 5 Inches Figure 1 Portrait Orientation Landscape Landscape refers to horizontal orientation where the width of the page is
160. gh 9F are printable symbols Cancels Character Set Select activated by ESC 7 Comment See the character set charts in Appendix D for the printable symbols 126 Condensed Print Condensed Print ASCII Code SI ESC SI Hex Code 1B OF Dec Code 15 27 15 Purpose Sets condensed print where If the emulation is set at 5 cpi it is changed to 8 55 cpi If the emulation is set at 10 cpi itis changed to 17 1 cpi If the emulation is set at 12 cpi itis changed to 20 cpi if 20 cpi is enabled Comment The Proprinter XL condensed print control code SI affects all subsequent characters After receiving code SI all characters are printed in condensed print until reset by control code DC2 printer reset or a new print mode control code Example The following sample illustrates condensed character printing and reset CONTROL CODE SI SELECTS CONDENSED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE DC2 RESETS CONDENSED CHARACTER PRINTING Condensed Print Reset ASCII Code DC2 ESC DC2 Code 12 1B 12 Dec Code 18 27 18 Purpose Cancels condensed print where If the emulation is set at 6 or 8 55 cpi it is set to 5 cpi If the emulation is set at 12 17 1 20 cpi it is set to 10 cpi Comment A new print mode control code cancels condensed print Example the Condensed Print control code section for an example of Condensed Print Reset 127 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Desele
161. ght n2 top n3 and bottom n4 form margins where n1 The width of the left margin hex value in character columns at the current cpi If the requested margin is larger than the current form width right margin the value is ignored n2 The width of the right margin hex value in character columns at the current cpi If the requested margin is larger than the current form width left margin the value is ignored n3 The length of the top margin hex value in character lines at the current If the requested margin is larger than the current form length bottom margin the value is ignored n4 The length of the bottom margin hex value in character lines at the current If the requested margin is larger than the current form length top margin the value is ignored Comment A hex value of FF for n1 n2 n3 or n4 indicates that the margin remains unaffected When set the right and bottom margins take effect immediately The left margin takes effect for the current line only if no horizontal motion has occurred for the line otherwise it takes effect on the next line The top margin always takes effect on the next form 98 Horizontal Tab Vertical tabs defined within the top and bottom margins are ignored Horizontal tabs are offset by the left margin and ignored within the right margin Horizontal Tab ASCII Code HT Hex Code 09 Dec Code 9 Purpose Moves the logical printhead right
162. ght Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Perforation Skip Form Length Absolute Length Funct of LPI Form Width Absolute Width Funct of CPI Host Commands Portrait 10 0 6 0 Letter Gothic Enabled Disable Disable Disable Top of Line 120 DPI 72 DPI 0 characters 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces 0 inches 0 inches 0 inches 0 inches Disable 6 0 inches 36 lines 4 1 inches 41 characters Enabled 115 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter 1 XL Emulation with Control Codes Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes IMPORTANT 116 The following information is listed for each code function where applicable ASCII Code The standard ASCII name for the control code Hex Code The control code numeric equivalent in hexadecimal Dec Code The control code numeric equivalent in decimal Purpose The function s of the control code Comment Any exceptions or limitations to use of the control code Example Where applicable a sample is shown using the control code along with the result of running the program If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that are defined in the control code description unpredictable results may occur Escape Control Code Header Proprinter XL codes use only ESC as the control code introducer For example to enable bold print use the bold print control code character G as follows Ascii ESC G Hex 1
163. he Page Length value in the PRINTER CONTROL menu on the front panel For more information on setting the Page Length from the printer s front panel see your User s Guide Horizontal Movements in Printer Resolution These commands move the current position horizontally in printer resolution dots ASCII Code SSCC Y n Hex Code SSCC 59 Dec Code SSCC89n Purpose Define the relative horizontal movement from the current position where n four digit number specifying the move distance in printer dots ASCII Code SSCCZ n Hex Code SSCC5An Dec Code SSCC 90 Purpose Define the absolute horizontal movement from column zero where n four digit number specifying the move distance in printer dots 205 Chapter 7 _ The Super Set Commands PCX Data ASCII Code SSCC PCX data ESC RASTEREND Hex Code SSCC 27 PCX data 1B RASTEREND Dec Code SSCC 39 PCX data 27 RASTEREND Purpose Prints PCX data Line Spacing n 288 Inch ASCII Code SSCC L n Hex Code SSCC 4C n Dec Code SSCC 76 Purpose Specifies the line spacing in n 288 inch increments where 0001 through 9999 four ASCII digits Comment When the n 288 inch line spacing command is received all character printing is at n 288 inch vertical spacing until a new line spacing is selected 206 Page Orientation Select Page Orientation Select ASCII Code SSCC n alpha Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment SSCC 4F n SSCC 79 n Set chan
164. he check digit algorithm 227 Chapter 7 228 Bar Codes Table 67 Code 93 Character Set Character Hex Character Hex 0 0 P 50 1 1 Q 51 2 2 R 52 3 3 S 53 4 4 T 54 5 5 U 55 6 6 V 56 7 7 W 57 8 8 X 58 9 9 Y 59 A 41 Z 5A B 42 2D C 43 2bE D 44 SPACE 20 E 45 3F F 46 2F G 47 4 2B H 48 96 25 49 51 n a J 4A S2 n a K 4B S3 n a L 4C S4 n a M 4D Start n a N 4E Stop n a O 4F Code 128 Code 128 The Code 128 structure is shown in Figure 10 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION 9 M n 1 1 UPPER GUARD BAND 1 QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET LOWER GUARD BAND Lc OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 10 Code 128 Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code Each of the Code 128 subsets uses a unique start code and a common stop code both automatically provided by the ASCII Emulation Code 128A Data Field Subset A operates in the manual mode only Subset A data
165. he clear zone XXXX NOTE Illustration is not to scale Return Address Area Optional Line NON ADDRESS DATA Top Line NAME OF RECIPIENT Optional Line INFORMATION ATTENTION LINE Line Above Last DELIVERY ADDRESS Last Line POST OFFICE STATE ZIP Figure 13 FIM Structure NOTE Additional information regarding FIM bar code requirements can be obtained from the U S Postal Service s Publication 25 A Guide to Business Mail Preparation Quiet Zone The bar code structure requires a completely blank 1 1 4 inch wide 5 8 inch tall quiet zone reserved for only the appropriate FIM pattern You must provide sufficient space for this zone 236 FIM Start Stop Code The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning Data Field The bar code symbol uses a nine position bar no bar pattern of tall full bars of uniform height Use the letters A B C or D to specify the type of FIM Figure 14 illustrates how to generate a horizontal FIMC bar code and a POSTNET bar code ESC CF 0 0065 0001 001 C ESC CP 0 0050 0020 009 481 701892 y 0001 x 0065 gt MOTOR COMPANY 17500 Cartwright Road Irvine CA 92623 y 0020 x20050 NOTE Illustration is not to
166. he event of an error 209 Chapter 7 _ The Super Set Commands Horizontal Image Shift ASCII Code SSCC Hex Code SSCC 23 20 n Dec Code SSCC35 45 n Purpose Shifts image left or right in 1 1000 inches The brackets around the symbol indicate it is optional do not use these brackets in the command where shifts the image left No will shift the image right thousandths of inches to shift the image horizontally range 0000 through 1000 Image Width ASCII Code SSCC w n1 n2 Hex Code SSCC 77 n1 3B n2 Dec Code SSCC 119 n159 n2 where n2 image width four ASCII digits Table 53 Image Width n1 Value ASCII Units of n2 0 Current CPI 1 Inches 2 Centimeters Linefeed ASCII Code SSCC X n Hex Code SSCC58n Dec Code SSCC 88 Purpose Moves a linefeed of n printer resolution n must be in the range of 001 through 999 This command does not affect the current LPI setting The movement is a linefeed of n the native printer resolution which is not part of the command 210 Print Engine Options Media Handling ASCII Code SSCCM n Hex Code SSCC 4D n Dec Code SSCC77n Purpose Defines how the printer handles the media See Table 54 for valid values Table 54 Media Handling n Value ASCII Meaning 0 Continuous paper 1 Tear Off Strip Move paper out after data timeout move paper back in when more data is received 2 Tear Of
167. he first character column Comment When configured from the front panel for backspace BS moves the character position indicator the logical print head position one character space to the left at the current character pitch setting The code is ignored if the logical print head is positioned at the first character column Example If you were to print five characters then two BS commands then two characters the output would look like the sample below TTTFF Bell ASCII Code BEL Hex Code 07 Dec Code 7 Purpose Sounds the printer s buzzer beeper Comment The BEL function sounds the buzzer beeper for 0 2 seconds upon receipt of this command 30 Bold Print Bold Print ASCII Code SFCC SFCCj Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example SFCC47 SFCC 6A SFCC 71 SFCC 106 Selects bold character printing When the bold character printing control code is received all characters are printed in bold until reset by the bold print reset control code or printer reset Bold Print is the same as printing double strike on an impact printer When SFCC j is used bold printing is selected for one line only and reset by the bold print reset control code Emulation reset or a paper motion command The following sample illustrates bold character printing CONTROL CODE ESC G SELECTS BOLD CHARACTER PRINTING FOR EXAMPLE AaBbCcDdEeFfGgHhI iJ jKkL 1MmNnOoPp CONTROL CODE ESC H CANCELS BOLD CHARACTER PRIN
168. he orientation of the bar code Data Field For PostBar a variable length data field of digits 0 through 3 are allowed to represent the bars Full Height 0 Ascender 1 Descender 2 and Tracker 3 For Royal Mail the data is restricted to alohanumeric characters A through Z and 0 through 9 Each bar width is equal and must be 020 inch 005 inch Horizontal spacing between bars pitch must be 22 bars 2 bars per inch over any 0 50 inch portion of the bar code The height of the bars Full Height has a maximum of 0 230 inches and a minimum of 0 165 inches Check Digit For PostBar you are responsible for encoding and check digit For Royal Mail a modulo 6 check digit is inserted at the end of the data field 243 Chapter 7 Codes POSTNET The POSTNET bar code structure is illustrated in Figure 19 and described on the following pages The POSTNET code can be a part of the address block and appear anywhere within a vertical 4 inch area across the length of the mail piece Return Address Area Postage Area ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA SR SC POSITION a QUIET ZONE i i QUIET i START BAR CODE DATA FIELD STOP i ZONE cope CODE ZONE i 1 Issue ceo ee eee ns J CHECK DIGIT Figure 19 POSTNET Structure NOTE Additional information regarding POSTNET bar code requirements c
169. he output would look like the sample below TTTFF 80 Bell Bell ASCII Code BEL Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 07 7 Sounds the printer s buzzer beeper The BEL function sounds the buzzer beeper for 0 2 seconds upon receipt of this command Bit Image Mode Single Density ASCII Code ESC K n1 n2 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example 1B 4B n1 n2 27 75 n1 n2 Selects Single Normal Density Bit Image graphics n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required For detailed information see the Bit Image section in Chapter 8 The following example produces a pattern of Single Density Bit Image graphics The 9 data bit pattern is repeated 27 times Compare this example to the double density and quadruple density examples SINGLE DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS AAS SPP 81 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Bit Image Mode Double Density ASCII Code ESC L n1 n2 Hex Code 1 4 7 2 Dec Code 27 76 n1 n2 Purpose Selects Double Density Bit Image graphics where n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expre
170. hes can be set using the following command line SFCC INCHES n f where nis the whole number of inches and fis the fractional increment in 0 5 inch increments When using the SFCC in a Command Line the SFCC must be the first non blank symbol in the line space hex 20 is a blank symbol In addition characters following spaces other than a valid line terminator in a Command Line are ignored so that user comments can be included on the Command Line The valid line terminators are Form Feed FF Line Feed LF and Carriage Return CR however when used in the Command Line these line terminators do not cause any paper motion If a Command Line contains an error the command is not executed and the line truncates to include any of the error messages listed in the following table Table 2 Command Line Error Messages Error Message Explanation Invalid Parameter The command received cannot be interpreted correctly or the correct command is not followed by an expected delimiter Parameter Out of Bounds A decimal parameter in the command is out of range Missing Parameter One or more necessary parameters is missing from the command Illegal Character in Decimal A decimal parameter contains a non numeric Parameter character or a fractional digit is out of range Too Many Digits in Decimal A decimal parameter contains too many Parameter digits Attribute Set and Reset Codes Certain p
171. hex 37 Graphics DP 10 cpi 8 hex 38 Graphics NLQ 10 cpi 9 hex 39 Scientific DP 10 cpi 10 hex 3A Scientific DP 12 cpi 11 hex 3B Scientific NLQ 10 cpi 12 hex 3C Multinational at Primary set mode and pitch 87 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Comment asterisk character hex 2A may be substituted for the numeric values of x y or z If the asterisk is the value selected for x the character set does not change If is the value selected for y or z the previously selected international language and or extended character set for the selected character set are used The character set international language and extended character set can also be selected from the printer control panel The control code setting overrides the control panel selection Except for the asterisk value discussed above values other than those shown in the tables results in the control sequence being terminated Characters 80 9F Control Codes ASCII Code ESC 7 Hex Code 1B37 Dec Code 2755 Purpose Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 through 9F are control codes Also includes hex codes 03 through 06 and 15 in the Serial Matrix printer protocol Cancels Character Set Select activated by ESC 6 or ESC u Comment This feature is also selectable from the control panel see the Alternate Set 80 9F parameter in the configuration chapter of your User s Guide 88 Characters 80 9
172. i n m n c n Hex Code SSCC 4B 57 69 n 6D n 63 n 2E Dec Code SSCC 75 87 105 n 109 n 99 n 46 Comment The brackets indicate optional parameters in the command string Do not include the brackets in your command Only one parameter may be used per command where n sets the form width in inches n is the number of inches and can be any number of digits but is limited by the maximum form width m n sets the form width in millimeters n is the number of millimeters and can be any number of digits but is limited by the maximum form width c n sets the form width in number of characters n is the number of characters and can be any number of digits but is limited by the maximum form width period is the command terminator Comment The form length and width can both be set in the same command The command format is as follows ASCII Code SSCC K L i n m n I n W i n m n c Hex Code SSCC 4B 4 69 n 6D n 6C 57 69 n 6D n 63 n 2E Dec Code SSCC 75 76 105 n 109 108 n 87 105 109 n 99 46 204 Host Form Size Host Form Size ASCII Code SSCC Hn Hex Code SSCC 48 Dec Code SSCC 72n Table 49 Host Form Size Values n Value hex Meaning 0 Disable The default setting Sets the form length equal to the Page Length value specified in the PRINTER CONTROL menu on the front panel 1 Enable The specified host form length does not affect the setting of t
173. ially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment For detailed information see the Bit Image section in Chapter 8 Graphics Example The following example produces Double Density Double Speed Bit Image graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image Mode example Note that the amount of data must be doubled for double density the data is used 54 times rather than 27 DOUBLE DENSITY DOUBLE SPEED BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS NAAN 121 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Bit Image Mode Quadruple Density ASCII Code ESC Z n1 n2 Hex Code 1B 5A n1 n2 Dec Code 27 90 n1 n2 Purpose Selects Quadruple Density Bit Image graphics where n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment For detailed information see the Bit Image section in Chapter 8 Graphics The printed density in this mode is 120 dpi horizontal and 72 dpi vertical if selected when the Letter Gothic DP print mode is active Example The following example produces quadruple density graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image Mode example Note that the amount of data must be quadrupled for quadruple den
174. ible Plot Mode Odd Even Dot Plotting 264 This subsection describes the P Series compatible odd even dot Plot mode of operation The P Series plot has a rigid format wherein each line of data contains a plot command code the plot data and an LF code hex 0A The P Series codes hex 04 and 05 respectively can be placed anywhere on the command line The P Series XQ codes hex 04 and 05 respectively can also be placed anywhere on the command line without degrading plot speed When P Series Plot mode is enabled by an EOT hex 04 or ENQ hex 05 code all control codes except LF CR and FF are ignored Any control sequence parameter prior to a plot code is acted upon immediately Any control sequence parameter following an EOT or ENQ code is treated as plot data If any combination of EOT hex 04 or ENQ hex 05 code is received in a single line the priority of action is EOT hex 04 takes priority over ENQ hex 05 ENQ has the same priority level and is acted upon in the order received A printable symbol is defined as any character or command that might cause the head of a serial printer to move away from character column one Plot Density Plot density refers to the number of dots per inch dpi printed in a single dot row The dots are plot dots not target machine dots measuring 1 60 inch horizontally and vertically Two types of plot density are available with P Series Plot mode graphics normal density and
175. ilable as an option The default is no check digit if the check digit is allowed to be optional where H activates the height variable where hh two digit bar code height in 1 10 inches The default is as specified in the individual bar code specifications where D activates dark bar code The x and y values are added to the current cursor position You cannot specify the upper left corner to be above the current print position If xxxx 0000 and yyyy 0000 and there are no line feeds any text following the bar code command prints next to the bar code Notice that the x horizontal cursor position is automatically updated See Figure 3 New Cursor Original Position Cursor Position n mmmmmmmme9 7 7 7 7 I 1 523456754321 Figure 3 Bar Code Example 1 Bar Code Format However if the values are other than 0000 the original cursor position remains intact despite the printing of the bar code See Figure 4 which shows xxxx 10 and yyyy 5 Original C Posion es SS me 5 1 5523456754321 Figure 4 Bar Code Example 2 To place the text below the bar code you must insert line feed commands See Figure 5 Original Cursor Positions 7o cmn cere 4 1 23456 54321 TEXT Figure 5 Bar Code Example 3 221 Chapter 7 Codes Australian 4 State The Australian 4 State structure is shown in Figure 6 and
176. ine Spacing n 72 Inch ASCII Code ESCA n Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example 1B41n 2765n Stores a line spacing of n 72 inch increments n 1 through 85 hex 01 through hex 55 all others are ignored When the ESC A control sequence is received all line feed commands following an ESC 2 sequence are at n 72 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting and the message display reflects the line spacing in lines per inch Small values of n may result in overlapping lines Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript characters are used on the same line Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap The following example illustrates 35 72 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC A 35 SETS LINE SPACING AT 35 72 INCH INCREMENTS FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER LINE SPACING IS SELECTED The ESC 2 sequence page 132 asserts the line spacing that was stored by the preceding ESC A sequence 139 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Line Spacing n 216 Inch ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B33n Dec Code 2751n Purpose Specifies the line spacing at n 216 inch increments where 1 through 255 hex 01 through hex FF Comment When th
177. ines Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript characters are used on the same line Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap Example The following example illustrates n 216 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC J 200 PERFORMS A 200 216 INCH LINE FEED FUNCTION FOR ONE LINE ONLY 100 Line Spacing 1 6 Inch Line Spacing 1 6 Inch ASCII Code ESC 2 ESCAn Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example 1B 32 1B41 n 27 50 2765n ESC 2 sets line spacing to 6 Ipi or as set by ESC A The value of n should be 12 if using ESC A n ESC 2 asserts n 72 inch line spacing as set by ESC A page 102 If no distance has been set by ESC A the distance is 1 6 inch The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting The following example illustrates 1 6 inch line spacing and assumes that a distance has not been set by ESC A CONTROL CODE ESC 2 SETS LINE SPACING AT 6 LPI FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi ASCII Code ESC 0 ESCAn Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example 1B 30 2741n 27 48 27 65 Specifies continuous line spacing at 1 8 inch increments 8 When the 1 8 inch line spacing control code ESC 0 is received all lines are printed at 8 until a new line spacing is selected or the printer
178. ing the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Emphasized Print ASCII Code SFCC E Hex Code SFCC 45 Dec Code SFCC 69 Purpose Selects emphasized character print format Comment When the emphasized print control code is received all characters are printed in emphasized print until reset by the emphasized print reset control code or printer reset Emphasized print is ignored during superscript or subscript printing and when 15 20 cpi characters have been selected Example The following sample illustrates emphasized character printing CONTROL CODE ESC E SELECTS EMPHASIZED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE ESC F CANCELS EMPHASIZED CHARACTER PRINTING Emphasized Print Reset ASCII Code SFCC F Hex Code SFCC 46 Dec Code SFCC 70 Purpose Resets emphasized character printing Comment The emphasized print reset control code only resets the emphasized print character attribute Example See the Emphasized Print control code example above for an example of Emphasized Print Reset Emulation Reset ASCII Code SFCC Hex Code SFCC 40 Dec Code SFCC 64 Purpose Initializes all print mode related parameters to their power up configuration values Comment Print mode line spacing international language selection margins form length skip over perforation and character pitch are reset to their power up configuration values Character by character and line by line attributes are canceled The vertical format unit is
179. int attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript overlapping lines may occur Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap Example The following example illustrates 7 72 inch line spacing mr TREE REAA SUPSFOMRNTMETIESSc ecco 48 Line Spacing n 72 Inch Line Spacing n 72 Inch ASCII Code SFCC An Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example SFCC 41 n SFCC 65n Stores a line spacing of n 72 inch increments 1 through 85 hex 01 through hex 55 all others are ignored When the SFCC A control sequence is received all line feed commands following an SFCC 2 sequence are at n 72 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting Small values of n may result in overlapping lines Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript characters are used on the same line Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap The following example illustrates 20 72 inch line spacing The SFCC 2 sequence page 46 asserts the line spacing that was stored by the preceding SFCC A sequence CONTROL CODE ESC A 20 SETS LINE SPACING AT 20 72 INCH INCREMENTS FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED 49 Chapter 2 _ Configuring the P S
180. iptions as well as in the description of the Super Set Character Set Selection SSCC R command see page 198 Printer Configuration Matching certain printer operational settings to those of the host computer is known as printer configuration The settings or configuration parameters are adjusted according to the printer function key descriptions in your printer User s Guide You can select ASCII Emulation configuration options directly from the printer control panel or by the software commands described in Chapters 2 through 7 of this manual Your User s Guide also contains detailed configuration menus and diagrams as well as descriptions of each configuration parameter available with your printer NOTE You must also enter and exit the ASCII Emulation configuration menu according to your printer User s Guide configuration procedures Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another level in the configuration or exit the configuration menu completely 21 Chapter 1 _ Introduction 22 2 P Series Printer Protocol Introduction This chapter describes the P Series emulation host control codes Emulation refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language A printer control language is the coding System used to convey manipulate and print data It contains character codes and command sequences that configure the emulation In this manual the ter
181. irst character in the data field is used as the number system character Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent a limited character set numbers 0 9 and Special Characters Start Center and Stop The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven modules The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right data field to permit read direction sensing Readable Data The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code symbol 235 Chapter 7 Codes Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The number system character is included in the check digit algorithm FIM The FIM Facing Identification Mark bar code structure is shown in Figure 13 and described on the following pages The left boundary must begin 3 inches from the right edge of the mail piece The right most bar must be 2 inches 1 8 inch from the right edge of the mail piece Bars are 5 8 inch 1 8 inch tall the top of the bars must be no lower than 1 8 inch from the top edge of the mail piece and may touch the top edge of the mail piece The bar code baseline must be within 1 8 inch from the bottom edge of t
182. is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting The value of n should be 9 if using ESC A n The following example illustrates 1 8 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC O SETS LINE SPACING AT 1 8 8 LPI INCH FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED 101 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Line Spacing 7 72 Inch ASCII Code ESC 1 Hex Code 1B31 Dec Code 27 49 Purpose Specifies the line spacing at 7 72 inch 10 3 increments Comment When the 7 72 inch line spacing control code is received all lines are printed at the 7 72 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting and the message display reflects the line spacing as 10 3 lines per inch Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript overlapping lines may occur Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap Example The following example illustrates 7 72 inch line spacing R 9 1 SETS ado RES RA ANOTHER SPRU ENG YESseLecteD Line Spacing n 72 Inch ASCII Code ESC An Hex Code 1B41n Dec Code 2765n Purpose Stores a line spacing of n 72 inch increments where n 1 through 85 all others are ignored
183. its that can be translated into machine instructions A printer can recover from an erroneous code sequence by performing as much of the function as possible or parsing the valid parameter from the invalid PI Paper instruction A signal from the host with the same timing and polarity as the data lines Pin configuration Establishes the physical attachment and protocol conversion connections for the host interface Pitch The number of text characters printed per horizontal inch Specified in characters per inch or cpi Pixel Acronym of picture element or picture cell The smallest displayable picture element on a video monitor or printable unit in a printer Point A unit of measure in printing and typography used to specify type sizes heights of font characters etc There are 72 points in a vertical inch thus one point equals 1 72 inch or approximately 0 0138 inch Examples this is e point type This is 10 point type This IS 1 6 point type Print Mode The horizontal and vertical dot density at which the characters are printed 296 Print Pitch Printer Configuration Printer Interface Protocol RAM Read Reset Resolution ROM Defines the number of characters that can be printed in one inch It can be translated into the width of the character The operating properties that define how the printer responds to signals and commands received from the host computer These properties are set to match the
184. ity Graphics ASCII Code ENQ Hex Code 05 Dec Code 5 Purpose Selects odd dot plot mode to print dots in odd numbered dot columns for normal density plotting Comment The Odd Dot Plot control code can occur anywhere in the data line before the line terminator It defines certain data between the next and last paper motion commands as odd dot plot data These data are plotted at 60 by 72 dots per inch When this mode is exited the print mode and attributes last selected remain active A detailed description of plotting can be found in Chapter 8 Graphics This command can occur anywhere in the datastream and is acted upon immediately affecting the entire current print line Example CONTROL CODE 05 HEX SELECTS ODD DOT PLOT USING QQQQQQQQQQ AS THE DATA RESULTS IN THE FOLLOWING DOT PATTERN Select Letter Gothic DP ASCII Code STX ETX HT Hex Code 02 03 09 Dec Code 2 3 9 Purpose Selects Letter Gothic DP print mode NOTE Configure this feature using the control panel Comment Any of the three codes select Letter Gothic DP print mode Both ETX and HT also select 17 1 cpi if you configure the printer from the control panel see page 67 These commands can occur anywhere in the datastream and are acted upon immediately affecting the entire current print line Example CONTROL CODE 02 SELECTS LETTER GOTHIC PRINT MODE FOR ONE LINE ONLY JUST EXITED LETTER GOTHIC MODE BY EXECUTING AN LF 72 Space
185. ized offset print send the ESC character immediately followed by the E character do not add a space character ASCII ESC E Hex 1B 45 Dec 27 69 Set and Reset Codes Set and Reset Codes Set and reset are another way of saying turn on and turn off select and deselect or enable and disable Some printer features are set and reset with an escape sequence and the numbers 1 or 0 In such cases you can represent 1 and 0 as hexadecimal codes 01 and 00 or as the ASCII codes for the numerals 1 and 0 hexadecimal 31 and 30 NUL Code NUL hex 00 is ignored by the printer and can be used as a fill character however it can not be used to add blank spaces since it is not a space character NUL can also be used as a parameter terminator for the Set Horizontal Tabs page 175 or Set Vertical Tabs multibyte control code page 195 NOTE Hex 80 in the 0437 PC Character Set and Hex 7F in the 0850 PC Character Set are treated as a NUL however these two controls can not be used as parameter terminators 155 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Print Modes Supported for Character Sets Table 37 summarizes which print modes are supported for the Epson FX 1050 emulation character sets Additional information about character set support is provided in the Notes column of the table NOTE The print mode support for the languages shown in Table 37 Epson Set ASCII and following is the sam
186. l Tab Set Clear ASCII Code ESC B n1 n2 n3 nk NUL Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example CONTROL CODE 1B 42 n1 n2 n3 nk 00 27 66 n1 n2 n3 nk 0 Sets vertical tab positions n1 through nk specify the line number for the vertical tab s for a maximum of 16 tab positions NUL must be used as the sequence terminator The physical position on the paper is the product of n and the current line spacing Subsequent line spacing changes do not change the tab position If the value of n defines a tab stop that exceeds the forms length that tab position is ignored In Serial Matrix printer protocol vertical tab positions are set by control code ESC B and executed by control code VT The tab positions must be in ascending order or the sequence terminates More information on Serial Matrix vertical tab setting is provided in Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting If the ESC B command is followed immediately by NUL the vertical tab positions are cleared The following sample illustrates Vertical Tab Setting ESC B 15 20 0 SETS A VERTICAL TAB AT LINE 15 AND AT LINE 20 CONTROL CODE VT MOVES PAPER TO THE NEXT VERTICAL TAB CONTROL CODE VT MOVES PAPER TO THE NEXT VERTICAL TAB THIS IS LINE TWENTY 111 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes 112 5 IBM Proprinter III XL Printer Protocol Introduction This chapter describes the Proprinter III XL emulation host cont
187. l code page 163 for an example of Condensed Print Reset Cut Sheet Paper Feed Control ASCII Code ESC EM n Hex Code 1B 19 Dec Code 2725n Purpose This code controls the paper feed mechanism on Epson printers TComment The printer ignores this command Define a Download Character ASCII Code ESC amp Code 1B 26 Dec Code 2738 Purpose Defines a download character Comment The printer ignores this command and removes all downloaded font data from the data stream Delete Character ASCII Code DEL Code 7F Dec Code 127 Purpose Deletes the previous character on a line Comment This command is ignored if it occurs immediately after a CR or a paper motion command Characters truncated due to line length restrictions are not affected by this code 164 Double High Print Set Reset Double High Print Set Reset ASCII Code ESC w n Hex Code 1B77n Dec Code 27 119 Purpose Turns double high character printing on and off Double high characters are standard width but twice as high where hex 1 or hex 31 turns double high printing on hex 0 or hex 30 turns double high printing off Comment The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in double high NOTE It is recommended to use double Line Feeds and Carriage Returns when double high character printing is on after an ESC w control code has been sent or else the printer overstrikes text that has already printed t If Supe
188. le 1B 30 27 48 Specifies continuous line spacing at 1 8 inch increments 8 Ipi The value of n should be 9 if using ESC A n When the 1 8 inch line spacing control code is received all lines are printed at 8 until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting The following example illustrates 1 8 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC O SETS LINE SPACING A 1 8 INCH 8 LPT FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED Line Spacing 7 72 Inch 10 3 Ipi ASCII Code ESC 1 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example 1B 31 27 49 Specifies the line spacing at 7 72 inch 10 3 Ipi increments When the 7 72 inch line spacing control code is received all lines are printed at the 7 72 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting and the message display reflects the line spacing as 10 3 lines per inch Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript overlapping lines may occur Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap The following example illustrates 7 72 inch line spacing Ne TPE Og I SHBSCQUENT TYESsELECTED 138 Line Spacing n 72 Inch L
189. le codes designated as international characters Table 36 Epson Character Set Hex 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 SP 0 P p a SP 0 1 B 1 A Q a q B 1 A Q a q 2 DC2 2 B R b r 2 B R b r 3 DC3 3 C S C S 3 C S S 4 i DC4 4 D T d t i 4 t 5 x 5 E U e u 9 5 E U e u 6 amp 6 F V f V amp 6 F V f 2 7 7 G W g w i 7 G Ww g w 8 BS CAN 8 H x h x 8 H X h x 9 HT U 9 i y N 9 Y i y A LF a 2 j 2 i J 2 j 2 VT ESC K k K k C FF L Pt L I D M m M m E SO gt N A n gt gt n a E SI DEL The international characters in 00 1F and 80 9F appear when you invoke control code ESC I 1 You may use the Epson configuration menus described in your User s Guide or the ESC R control code to select an international character set Table 37 on page 156 provides information on print mode support for each character set Normally these characters are either blank or control codes The implementation is that the control codes hide the non italic international characters even in hex 00 through 1F and DEL DEL conceals the non italic slashed zero 153 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Configuring
190. llons 4 6 364 Volume Cubic Inches n4 n6 365 Volume Cubic Feet n4 n6 366 Volume Cubic Yards n4 n6 367 Gross Volume Cubic Inches 4 6 368 Gross Volume Cubic Inches 4 6 369 Gross Volume Cubic Inches 4 6 37 Quantity of Units Contained For Use With AI 02 Only n2 n 8 400 Customer s Purchase Order Number n3 an 30 401 Consignment Number n3 an 30 410 Ship To Deliver To Location Code Using EAN 13 n3 n13 411 Bill To Invoice To Location Code Using EAN 13 n3 n13 412 Purchase From Location Code of Party From Whom Goods Are Purchased n3 n13 413 Ship For UCC EAN Location Code n3 n13 414 EAN Location Code For Physical Identification n3 n13 420 Ship To Deliver To Postal Code Within a Single Postal Authority n3 an 20 421 Ship To Deliver To Postal Code With 3 Digit ISO Country Code Prefix n3 n3 an 9 8001 Roll Products Width Length Core Diameter Direction and Splices n4 n14 8003 UPC EAN Number and Serial Number Or Returnable Asset n4 n14 an 16 248 UCC EAN 128 Table 73 UCC EAN 128 Application Identifiers continued Application Identifier Content Format Al 8004 UCC EAN Serial Identification n4 an 30 8005 Identifies the Price Per Unit of Measure n4 n6 8006 Component of an Article n44n144n2 n2 8018 Service Relation Number n4 n18 8100 Coupon Extended Code Number System Character and Offer n4 n1 n5 8101 Coupon
191. lustrates double high character printing CONTROL CODE ESC w 1 SELECTS ESC w 0 CANCELS DOUBLE HIGH PRINTING Emphasized Print ASCII Code ESC E Hex Code 1B 45 Dec Code 27 69 Purpose Selects emphasized character print format Comment When the emphasized print control code is received all characters are printed in emphasized print until reset by the emphasized print reset control code or printer reset Emphasized print is ignored during superscript or subscript printing and when 15 20 cpi characters have been selected Example The following sample illustrates emphasized character printing CONTROL CODE ESC E SELECTS EMPHASIZED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE ESC F CANCELS EMPHASIZED CHARACTER PRINTING 93 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Emphasized Print Reset ASCII Code ESC F Hex Code 1 46 Dec Code 27 70 Purpose Resets emphasized character printing Comment The emphasized print reset control code only resets the emphasized print character attribute Example See the Emphasized Print example Emulation Reset ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B 40 Dec Code 2764 Purpose Initializes all print mode related parameters to their power up configuration Comment Print mode line spacing international language selection margins form length skip over perforation and character pitch are reset to their power up configuration Character by character and line by line attributes
192. m distance it is ignored Settings in proportional mode are treated as 10 cpi 189 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Set Forms Length by Lines ASCII Code ESC C n Hex Code 1B43n Dec Code 2767n Purpose Sets the form length by lines where n 1 through 192 hex 01 through hex CO to specify the number of lines per form at the current line spacing Comment The forms length is set to the number of lines defined by the quotient of n divided by the current lines per inch so that the units are in inches The current line becomes the first line of the form The forms length is always defined in inches therefore changing the after this control code has been issued does not change the forms length If the calculated forms length in lines is not an exact multiple of the target machine dot size the forms length value is adjusted down to the next possible multiple When forms length is set by an ESC C sequence the skip over perforation set by ESC N is cancelled Set Forms Length in Inches ASCII Code ESC C NUL n Hex Code 1B4300n Dec Code 27670n Purpose Sets the form length to n inches where 1 through 24 hex 01 through hex 18 to specify the number of inches on a form Comment Upon receipt of this code the current line becomes the first line of the form and the form length set becomes the current forms length Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of the fo
193. mat Table 61 Bar Code Type Codes continued t Selects Bar ASCII Hex Code M 4D MSI 34 PDF 417 4 PostBar P 50 POSTNET R 51 Royal Mail T 54 Telepen V 56 UCC EAN 128 A 41 UPC A E 45 UPC E S 53 UPC Shipping U 55 UPS 11 NOTE For all of the following parameters the digits are ASCII values where d the barcode delimiter which can be any character where data variable length printable data field NOTE The following parameters are optional where N activates the offset where the x and y coordinate unit system Table 62 x and y Coordinate Unit System n ASCII Selects Value 0 use current cpi and values 1 use 1 4 inch value 2 use 1 2 centimeter value 1 2 54 x 2 3 use 1 millimeter value 1 25 4 4 use Letter Gothic LG dot value hor 1 120 inch x vert 1 72 inch where four digit upper left corner x horizontal axis where yyyy four digit upper left corner y vertical axis where X activates magnification where mmmm magnification value Valid values are X1 X1 5 X1A X1B X2 X2A X3 and X4 219 Chapter 7 220 Bar Codes Comment where P activates printable data field variable where location of printable data field Table 63 Printable Data Field p ASCII Hex Selects Location A 41 above B 42 below default N 4E none where C calculate and plot check digit if ava
194. me character column using the Backspace BS control code page 80 Caution should be used when combining Superscript or Subscript printing with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High or small line spacing overlapping lines may occur Characters with different horizontal or vertical dot densities do not overlap Example following sample illustrates superscript subscript printing CONTROL CODE ESC S 0 SELECTS SUPERSCRIPT A2 B2 C2 CONTROL CODE ESC S 1 SELECTSsusscriptr 31yex 49pec CONTROL CODE ESC T CANCELS SUPERSCRIPT SUBSCRIPT PRINTING Superscript Subscript Printing Reset ASCII Code ESC T Hex Code 1B 54 Dec Code 27 84 Purpose Resets superscript and subscript printing as set by ESC S 108 Super Set Commands Super Set Commands ASCII Code ESC Code 1 7 7D Dec Code 27 124 125 59 Purpose Control code sequence used to introduce the super set commands Comment Super set commands affect the ASCII Emulation as a whole regardless of the printer protocol currently active The commands are sent from the host in the data stream to the printer and provide the following capabilities e Select a printer protocol e Change the page orientation Define various font attributes including typeface and point size e Select proportional fonts See Chapter 7 Super Set Programming for further information on the super set commands Underline ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B2D
195. ms emulation printer protocol and printer control language are synonymous In the P Series emulation mode your printer can print files coded for the P Series printer control language To select the P Series emulation mode as the active printer emulation select ASCII Emulation from the EMULATION menu and P Series from the Printer Protocol menu as described in the User s Guide The P Series emulation provides many configurable parameters The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 1 You can modify the emulation parameter values in two ways e The P Series host control codes An extensive set of P Series control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the P Series control code commands e The printer configuration menus You can modify a subset of the P Series emulation parameters using the printer configuration menus control panel keys and LCD as described in the User s Guide A parameter value set by a host control code generally overrides a value set from the printer s control panel NOTE Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to the printer s NVRAM memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer or reset it to the factory defaults The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the User s Guide To save the configur
196. n Dec Code 2745n Purpose Enables or disables automatic underlining of all characters where 0 to disable automatic underlining hex 00 or hex 30 n 1 to enable automatic underlining hex 01 or hex 31 Comment When automatic underline is enabled all characters including spaces are underlined until disabled Example The following sample illustrates automatic underlining and underlining reset CONTROL CODE ESC 1 ENABLES AUTOMATIC UNDERLINING CONTROL CODE ESC O0 DISABLES AUTOMATIC UNDERLINING 109 Chapter 4 110 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Vertical Tab ASCII Code VT Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 0B 11 Prints the data in the buffer and advances the paper to the next vertical tab position Vertical tab positions are set by control code ESC B and executed by control code VT In this mode if vertical tabs are loaded the paper position moves to the next vertical tab position If a vertical tab format is not defined the paper position is advanced to the next line at the current line spacing If a vertical tab format is defined but no vertical tab positions are set between the current print position and the end of the form the paper position is advanced to the top of the next form The VT code resets all single line print attributes More information on vertical tabs is provided in Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting Vertical Tab Set Clear Vertica
197. n 5 8859 9 607 AS400 Turkish 110 Arabic CP1046 311 Latin 9 8859 15 608 Unisys Turkish 111 Arabic Lam 1 400 DEC 256 Greek 609 NCR Turkish 112 Arabic Lam 2 401 ELOT 928 Greek 610 PST Turkish 200 Cyrillic 866 402 Greek 3 611 Unis 1 Turkish 201 Cyrillic CP 437 403 ABY Greek 612 Code Page 853 202 Cyrillic 113 404 ABG Greek 613 INFO Turkish 198 Character Set Selection Table 45 P Series and Serial Matrix Character Sets n Character Set n Character Set n Character Set 000 IBM Code Page 437 110 Arabic CP 1046 402 Greek 3 001 Multinational 111 Arabic Lam 1 403 ABY Greek 002 EMCA Latin 1 112 Arabic Lam 2 404 ABG Greek 003 DEC Multinational 200 Cyrillic 866 405 ELOT 927 Greek 004 OCR A 201 Cyrillic CP 437 406 Greek 851 005 OCR B 202 Cyrillic 113 407 Greek 437 006 Arabic 203 Cyrillic 8859 5 408 Greek 8859 7 007 Greek 204 ISO 915 500 Hebrew Old 008 Hebrew 205 Code Page 855 501 Hebrew New 009 Portuguese 206 7 Bit Cyrillic 502 Hebrew DEC 010 Spanish 207 Ukrainian 503 Hebrew Latin 1 011 Latin 1 300 Latin 2 8859 2 600 Data General Turkish 012 Latin 2 Slavic 852 301 Latin 2 852 601 DEC Turkish 013 Farsi 302 Mazovia 602 IBM Turkish 014 Turkish 303 Kamenicky 603 Siemens Turkish 015 Cyrillic 304 Roman 8 604 PTT Turkish 100 ASMO 449 305 PC 437 Slavic 605 IBC Turkish 101 ASMO 449 306 Slavic 1250 606 Bull Turkish 102 ASMO 708 307 Code Page 865 607 AS400 Turkish 103 ASMO 708 308 Code Page 860 608 Unisys Turkish 104 MS DOS CP 710 309
198. n2 interpreted and plotted as data until the n1 n2 definition is satisfied If excess data is received only the defined amount is plotted Excess data is interpreted as printable characters or control codes The maximum number of data bytes when using 132 column paper that can be included in the DATA portion of the program statement varies according to the operating mode At 60 dpi single density 792 bytes double density 2 1584 bytes quadruple density 3168 bytes Note that bit image data printed in Letter Gothic DP with the paper set to advance less than 1 6 inch causes data on successive lines to overlap A detailed description of the individual Bit Image control codes with examples is provided in the appropriate protocol chapter The following sample program written in BASIC produces Single Density Bit Image graphics of the pattern shown below The 7 data bit pattern is repeated 40 times The printed result of running the program is shown in Figure 30 10 LPRINT Single Density Bit Image Graphics 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 24 CHR 1 30 FOR N 1 TO 40 40 RESTORE 50 FOR I 0 7 60 READ R 70 LPRINT 80 NEXT I 90 NEXT N 100 DATA 73 146 36 255 36 146 73 110 LPRINT Single Density Bit Image Graphics Figure 30 Sample Single Density Bit Image Graphics 263 Chapter 8 P Series Compatible Plot Mode Odd Even Dot Plotting P Series Compat
199. nator hex or hex OC The control sequence for sending the P Series Normal Density Plot is 1 Send the plot command code ENQ hex 05 2 Sendthe plot data bytes Plot Data Line Format 3 Send a line terminator either a Line Feed LF hex Form Feed FF hex 0C A Carriage Return CR may also be used instead of the LF code provided the Carriage Return has been configured for Carriage Return Carriage Return Line Feed CR CR LF a Aline feed hex 0A used as the line terminator plots the contents of the buffer and advances the paper position a single dot row based on the vertical density of the current mode b Aform feed hex OC used as the line terminator plots the contents of the buffer and advances the paper to the next TOF Regardless of which line terminator code is sent the emulation defaults to the previously selected print mode unless further plot control codes are provided with the data Double Density Plot For double density plot the plot line contains Control Code hex 04 plot data bytes a Line Terminator hex or hex 0C Control Code hex 05 plot data bytes and a Line Terminator The control sequence for sending P Series Double Density Plot is 1 Send the even dot plot control code EOT hex 04 followed by plot data bytes Send a line terminator which causes the emulation to plot the data bytes the paper position is not advanced in Double Density Plot the emulation
200. nd 16 Used as general channel codes or filler channels only when the VFU is accessed by the PI signal line In an EVFU form that does not use the PI line the codes for Channels 15 and 16 function as the Start Load and End Load codes 273 Chapter 9 274 P Series EVFU End Load Code Hex 1F or 6F The end load code terminates the memory load program The end load code is hex 1F when the PI signal line is disabled low or hex 6F when the PI line is enabled high Channel codes in excess of 192 channels received prior to the end load code are discarded Using the EVFU Once the EVFU program has been enabled and loaded sending the appropriate channel code to the printer causes any data in the buffer to print and positions the paper to the next line on the form having the specified channel number assigned in EVFU memory For a data byte to be recognized as an EVFU instruction the following criteria must be met e The PI signal line must be enabled and set high and e Data bit 5 must be 0 not set OR e The PI signal line must be disabled or low and e Data bit 5 must be 1 set Given these conditions the lower four bits of a byte specifies the EVFU channel number Table 77 lists the EVFU channels and their equivalent data bytes with the PI signal line enabled Table 78 lists the EVFU channels and their equivalent data bytes with the PI line disabled Using the EVFU Table 77 P Series EVFU Codes PI Line Enabled
201. nd two spaces that total seven modules The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right data field to permit read direction sensing Readable Data The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning 234 EAN 13 EAN 13 The EAN 13 bar code structure is shown in Figure 12 and described below SH SC START CODE CODE POSITION STOR CODE QuIET LEFT DATA RIGHT DATA quiet ZONE FIELD FIELD ZONE NUMBER SYSTEM 9 IN _ _ _ CHARACTER OPTIONAL READABLE L DIGIT DATA FIELD FIELD Figure 12 EAN 13 Structure Quiet Zone Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the code to permit the scan to begin and end in a blank area You are responsible for providing sufficient space minimum of seven modules on the form for the quiet zones The number system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone Start Center Stop Codes The start center stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of the bar code These codes are automatically provided Number System Character The number system character field allows you to provide a code to a class or type of item The f
202. ne a Download Character Master Print Select Remove Downloaded Characters Select Print Quality Select Serif or Sans Serif Font Select User Defined Font Character Set Manipulation Character Set Select International Languages Enable Printing Hex Codes 00 1F and 80 9F Make Hex 80 9F Control Codes Make Hex 80 9F Printable Select Italic Character Set Data Manipulation T Cancel Line Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0 Delete Character Pass Bit 7 from Host Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1 ASCII CODE SI or ESC SI DC2 ESCwn ESC G ESC H ESCW n SO or ESC SO DC4 ESC ESC F ESC 4 ESC 5 ESC Sn ESC T ESC n ESC amp ESC n ESC NUL n NUL ESC xn ESCkn ESC ESC Rn ESC In ESC 7 ESC 6 ESC tn CAN ESC DEL ESC ESC gt PAGE 163 164 165 165 166 166 167 167 168 168 176 176 193 193 194 164 182 184 186 187 187 162 169 180 180 186 160 163 164 183 188 Backspace FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE Graphics Graphics Standard Density ESCK n1 n2 171 Graphics Double Density ESCL n1 n2 172 Graphics Double Density Double Speed ESCY n1 n2 173 Graphics Quadruple Density ESC Z n1 n2 174 Reassign Graphics Mode ESC sm 184 Select Graphics Mode ESC n2 185 Select 9 Pin Graphics Mode ESC m n1 2 1 dk 186 Other Functions Bell BEL 160 t Cut Sheet Paper Feed Control ESC EM n 164 Half Speed Mode On Off ESC sn 174 I
203. ne identification code defines the second line on the form etc Each line must have a line identification code Filler channel codes are used for lines that are not accessed by the print program Any channel code can be used as a filler except channel code 1 which is reserved for the top of form and channel code 12 which is reserved as the vertical tab channel The same filler channel code can be repeated as necessary for any number of lines Channel 1 The top of form code reserved as the first line on the form or the first line printed top of form position The operating program sends the channel 1 code to advance to the top of the next form After the memory is loaded a Form Feed code FF hex 0C moves the paper to the next channel 1 top of form Channels 2 through 11 13 and 14 Used as general channel codes line identification codes or filler channels Each line on the form must be identified by a channel code When the operating program sends the channel code the paper advances to the line identified by the channel code Lines not used by the operating program must be identified by filler channels unused channel codes Channel 12 Reserved as the Vertical Tab channel The Vertical Tab code VT hex OB prints any data in the print buffer and slews the paper to the next line identified by the channel 12 code If channel 12 is not loaded in the EVFU memory when a VT code is sent a single line feed is executed Channel 15 a
204. nes 277 Chapter 9 Serial Matrix VFU Table 79 P Series EVFU Line Slewing ASCII Data Bits Lines Slewed Hex Dec Code PI 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 16 DLE 1 X X X 1 0 0 0 0 1 11 17 DC1 1 X X X 1 0 0 0 1 2 12 18 DC2 1 X X X 1 0 0 1 0 3 13 19 DC3 1 X X X 1 0 0 1 1 4 14 20 DC4 1 X X X 1 0 1 0 0 5 15 21 1 X X X 1 0 1 0 1 6 16 22 SYN 1 X X X 1 0 1 1 0 7 17 23 ETB 1 X X X 1 0 1 1 1 8 18 24 CAN 1 X X X 1 1 0 0 0 9 19 25 EM 1 X X X 1 1 0 0 1 10 1A 26 SUB 1 X X X 1 1 0 1 0 11 1B 27 ESC 1 X X X 1 1 0 1 1 12 1C 28 FS 1 X X X 1 1 1 0 0 13 1D 29 GS 1 X X X 1 1 1 0 1 14 1E 30 RS 1 X 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 15 1F 31 US 1 X 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 16 X Undefined 0 or 1 1 High 0 Low Serial Matrix VFU 278 In the Serial Matrix Proprinter XL and Epson FX protocols the VFU is basically a set of preprogrammed vertical tabs Various lines of the form are assigned vertical tabs which are then accessed by control code for rapid vertical paper movement slewing to the tab position Two control codes are used for the Serial mode VFU ESC B for single channel tab setting and VT to execute a vertical tab These codes and the parameters surrounding their use are described in Chapter 4 Serial Matrix Printer Protocol in Chapter 5 IBM Proprinter XL Printer Protocol and in Chapter 6 Epson FX 1050 Printer Protocol Executing Vertical Tabs Executing Vertical Tabs
205. nes given in n If paper movement is commanded to a value of n greater than the page length the paper movement command is ignored The values of n must be in ascending order If they are not the sequence up to and including the out of sequence number is ignored The rest of the load is processed Skip over perforation is ignored You can clear any channel by sending ESC b c NUL where c is the channel number 191 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Skip Over Perforation ASCII Code ESC Nn Hex Code 1 4 Dec Code 27 78 Purpose Selects the number of lines at the current line spacing for the paper to skip at the bottom of the page where n 1 through 127 hex 01 through 7F Comment nis the number of lines skipped between the last line printed on one page and the first line on the next page The actual distance set is the product of n and the current line spacing If the value of n exceeds the current form length the skip is set to one line smaller than the form length or to 0 whichever is greater Skip over perforation set by this command overrides operator panel settings This feature is canceled by ESC O ESC C ESC C 0 Skip Over Perforation Cancel ASCII Code ESC O Hex Code 1 4 Dec Code 27 79 Purpose Cancels the skip over perforation set by ESC and resets the bottom margin to zero Comment O is ASCII uppercase o not zero 0 Super Set Commands
206. nfiguration parameter Printer Select must be set to Enable Refer to the User s Guide for information about this menu option This control code allows the printer to receive and print data from the host if it was deselected by DC3 If the printer was not deselected by DC3 this code is ignored Reassign Graphics Mode ASCII Code ESC sm Hex Code 1B3F sm Dec Code 2763sm Purpose Changes one graphics mode to another where sis a character L Y or Z which causes graphics mode to change to mode m 0 7 see Table 42 on page 185 Comment Sending data to the bit image command makes the data print according to the graphics mode you select with m Remove Downloaded Characters ASCII Code ESC NUL n NUL Hex Code 1B 00 n00 Dec Code 27580n0 Purpose X Erases all downloaded characters Comment The printer ignores this command but removes all data sent 184 Select Graphics Mode Select Graphics Mode ASCII Code ESC m n1 n2 Hex Code 1 2 n2 Dec Code 27 42 2 Turns 8 pin bit image graphics mode m Table 42 charts the Purpose graphics modes available Comment total number of columns n1 256n2 NOTE This command does not suppress hexadecimal FF from printing Table 42 Epson Graphics Modes i Option eae Density Resolution ode dots per inch dots per inch 0 Single density ESC K 60 120 1 Double density ESC L 120 120 2 High speed double density E
207. nhancement referring to larger than normal character width with no change in character height F Off or zero Compare with true A set of all variations and sizes of a type style See font monospaced The complete set of a given size of type including characters symbols figures punctuation marks ligatures signs and accents To fully describe a font you must specify seven characteristics 1 type family 2 spacing proportional or monospaced 3 type size 12 point 14 point etc 4 scale factor character height width ratio 5 type style 6 character weight and 7 character proportion normal condensed expanded 293 Appendix D 294 Font Directory Font name Font pattern Font landscape Font monospaced Font portrait Font proportional Font weight Font width Glyph Host computer The header file that contains the tables describing allowed the mode and pitch combinations The file also contains the tables used to set up the character sets and the international languages within the character sets See typeface A font pattern is the matrix of pels which represents a character symbol or image A font printed parallel to the long edge of a page or a font capable of being produced on a landscape page orientation Also called fixed pitch fonts Every character regardless of actual horizontal size occupies the same amount of font pattern space All monospaced fonts use specific
208. nitialize Printer ESC 176 Printer Deselect DC3 183 Printer Select DC1 184 Super Set Commands ESC 192 Unidirectional Printing 1 Line ESC lt 194 Unidirectional Printing Set Reset ESC Un 194 Backspace ASCII Code BS Hex Code 08 Dec Code 8 Purpose Moves the logical print head to the left one character space toward the first character column Comment that the previous printable characters are printed then moves the logical print head one character space to the left at the current pitch setting which includes double wide and ESC SP If the logical print head bumps into the left margin it stops t When backspacing over proportionally spaced characters Epson printers move back the width of each proportional character this emulation moves back based on the current cpi setting as if proportional spacing is disabled t If one or more Backspace control codes follow directly after a Bit Image Graphics command ESC K ESC L ESC Y or ESC Z the printer backspaces into the graphic pattern the number of dots depending on the current cpi setting For an Epson FX 1050 printer one Backspace sends the logical printhead directly to the beginning of the graphics pattern Example If you were to print five characters then two BS commands then two characters the output would look like the sample below TTTFF 159 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Bell ASCI
209. now waits for the second plot command and plot data bytes Send the odd dot plot control code ENQ 05 hex and a second line of data followed by a line terminator a Aline feed 0A hex used as the line terminator plots the contents of the buffer and advances the paper position a single dot row based on the vertical density of the current mode A CR if CR CR LF is configured may also be used with the same result b Aform feed 0C hex used as the line terminator plots the data bytes and advances the paper position to the next TOF Regardless of which line terminator code is sent the emulation defaults to the previously selected print mode unless further plot control codes are provided with the data 267 Chapter 8 P Series Compatible Plot Mode Odd Even Dot Plotting Plotting the Data P Series Plot Mode plots the image from the horizontal bit pattern Figure 34 duplicates the pattern shown in Figure 29 but is modified for Odd Dot Plot Eight dot rows are required two characters per row six columns per character 1st 2nd 1st 2nd CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER ODD COLUMNS ODD COLUMNS ASCII DECIMAL ASCII DECIMAL 135 7911 1 3 5 7 9 11 NW E 42 Q 64 0 w 0 J 9 u ROW 9 268 ee 64 e ee DR d 65 Figure 34 Odd Dot Plot Pattern Plan The following program uses the Odd Dot
210. nter XL 4 Epson FX 1050 FILE IO DISK IO CAPTURE Filename Captures all incoming data into a file named Filename Receipt of a FILE IO CAPTURE command without the Filename parameter will force the file data to be written to flash and will end the file capture DRIVE Letter This command is parsed for backwards compatibility However since the flash file system is a single device the drive letter will be ignored DEL Filename The DEL command will mark a file as deleted The space the file occupied will be freed the next time the printer is powered up 285 Appendix B The PTR SETUP Commands Table 80 PTR SETUP Commands continued Command Sub Command Parameter Description FILE IO DISK 10 RUNFILE File Prop The RUNFILE command will open the file named File for printing After the END command is processed the contents of File will get printed before any more data is read from the host If the Prop field is present RUNFILE will verify that Prop matches the saved file properties Any mismatch will cause the command to be ignored MAXSIZE Kb For backwards compatibility MINSIZE Kb For backwards compatibility FONT FontName Downloads an HP LaserJet font and saves it as FontName IFONT FontName Downloads a scalable AGFA type font and saves it as FontName ENGINE ALM WIDE wide
211. ntrol code selects the range as if data bit 8 is set to 0 and data is printed as characters from hex 20 through 7F Example See the Extended Character Set example 42 Form Feed Form Feed ASCII Code FF Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 0C 12 Prints the data in the buffer advances the paper position to the next top of form and moves the character position to the first character column The default forms length is determined by the configuration in nonvolatile memory Forms length is set by using the control panel or forms length control codes Code FF cancels all single line only print attributes The Form Feed command reacts differently when the VFU is active See Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting beginning on page 271 Forms Length Set Inches ASCII Code SFCC INCHES n f Purpose where Comment Sets the length of forms paper in inches n whole numbers from 1 through 24 hex 01 through hex 18 to specify the number of inches on a page f fractional number in 5 inch increments the minimum forms length is 0 5 inches Upon receipt of this code the current line becomes the first line of the form and the form length set becomes the current forms length Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of the form are cleared Forms length is defined in inches therefore subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command In INCHES mode incorrect values produ
212. number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required DATA consist of 8 bit dot columns with the MSB at the top and 1 bits producing dots For more information refer to Chapter 8 Graphics Comment You can change graphics density with the ESC command Example The following example produces double density bit image graphics of the pattern used in the standard density bit image mode example The amount of data must be doubled for double density the data are used 54 times rather than 27 DOUBLE DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS 172 Graphics Double Density Double Speed Graphics Double Density Double Speed ASCII Code ESC Y n1 n2 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where 1B 59 n1 n2 27 89 2 Selects double density double speed bit image graphics of 120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically n1 256n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment Example DATA consist of 8 bit dot columns with the MSB at the top and 1 bits
213. o move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing the remainder is added to the next paper motion command Small values of n may result in overlapping lines Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript characters are used on the same line Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap Example The following example illustrates n 216 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC J 200 PERFORMS A 200 216 INCH LINE FEED FUNCTION FOR ONE LINE ONLY 136 Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi ASCII Code ESC 2 ESCAn Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example 1B 32 27 50 ESC 2 sets line spacing to 6 or as set by ESC A The value of n should be 12 if using ESC A n ESC 2 asserts n 72 inch line spacing as set by ESC A page 134 If no distance has been set by ESC A the distance is 1 6 inch The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting The following example illustrates 1 6 inch line spacing and assumes that a distance has not been set by ESC A CONTROL CODE ESC 2 SETS LINE SPACING AT 6 LPI FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED 137 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi ASCII Code ESC 0 ESCAn Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Examp
214. ode n Hex Letter Gothic DP 00 Ignored 01 Courier NLQ 02 Courier NLQ 03 Ignored 04 Ignored 05 Courier NLQ 06 Courier NLQ 07 Courier NLQ italic Courier NLQ italic OF Comment The current pitch is not affected If an ignored value is used the Print Mode is set to Letter Gothic DP 143 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Select Proportional Spacing ASCII Code ESC P n Hex Code 1B50n Dec Code 2780n Purpose Enables disables proportional spacing of characters where n 1 3 5 odd value enables proportional spacing n 0 2 4 any even value disables proportional spacing Comment This command is ignored when a non proportional font is used Superscript Subscript Printing ASCII Code ESC 5 Hex Code 1B53n Dec Code 2783n Purpose Selects superscript or subscript printing where if n 0 2 4 any even value superscript printing is enabled if n 1 3 5 any odd value subscript printing is enabled Comment Superscript Subscript font prints at one half the normal vertical character height and at twice the normal vertical density When the superscript subscript control code is received all characters are superscript or subscript until reset by the superscript subscript reset control code or printer reset Emphasized print is ignored in the superscript subscript print mode Both superscript and subscript character
215. ol Codes Line Feed ASCII Code LF Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 0A 10 Prints the data in the buffer if any and advances the vertical character position one line at the current line space setting If configured for LF equals new line LF CR LF the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 of the new line Otherwise the logical print head does not move when configured for LF function only LFZLF ONLY The LF function cancels all single line print attributes such as double high elongated and double wide expanded characters This code is always configured for LF CR LF in the P Series XQ protocol In the P Series XQ Even Dot Plot mode high density graphics the LF code does not cause paper position motion the data in the buffer is plotted and the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 in anticipation of the Odd Dot Plot control code to complete high density graphic plotting In the P Series XQ Odd Dot Plot mode normal density graphics the LF code plots the data in the buffer advances the paper position a single dot row at the current vertical dot density and positions the logical print head at character column 1 Line Spacing 8 or 10 3 Ipi ASCII Code ACK Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example 06 6 Selects line spacing of 1 8 inch or 7 72 inch for current line only The line spacing control code can be placed anywhere in the data stream before the lin
216. om the menus or via host control codes can be saved to the printer s NVRAM memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer or reset it to the factory default configuration The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the User s Guide To save the configuration using host control codes refer to Appendix B PTR SETUP Option 113 Chapter 5 114 Introduction Proprinter Ill XL Emulation Default Settings The factory settings for the Proprinter III XL emulation menu options are shown in Table 25 Table 26 lists additional factory settings for parameters provided by the ASCII Emulation formatting menus The EMULATION menu options are described in the User s Guide Host control codes can override many of the settings for these menu options Table 25 Proprinter Ill XL Menu Option Factory Settings Characteristic Default Setting Define CR Code Auto LF Define LF Code FF Valid at TOF Character Set 20 CPI Condensed CR CR Enable LF LF Enable Code Page 437 Enable Proprinter Ill XL Emulation Default Settings Table 26 ASCII Emulation Menu Option Factory Settings Characteristic Default Setting Orientation CPI LPI Typeface Proportional Spacing Bold Print Italic Print Slashed Zero Text Position Horizontal DPI Vertical DPI Logical Form Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Physical Page Left Margin Ri
217. onal Unidirectional Printing 4 12 cpi compressed 20 12 to 20 3 n a n a n a 2 Form feed at TOF Enable Ignore 1 Print Width 13 2 inches 8 inches 0 Sheet feeder n a n a 135 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Line Feed ASCII Code LF Hex Code 0A Dec Code 10 Purpose Prints the data in the buffer if any and advances the vertical character position one line at the current line space setting Comment configured for LF equals new line LF CR LF the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 of the new line Otherwise the logical print head does not move when configured for LF function only LFZLF ONLY The LF function cancels all single line print attributes such as double high elongated and double wide expanded characters Line Feed n 216 Inch One Line Only ASCII Code ESC Jn Hex Code 1 4 Dec Code 27 74 Purpose Advances the vertical character position 1 216 inch for one line only where 1 through 255 hex 01 through hex FF Comment n 216 inch line feed control code is effective for one line only All single line only print attributes are canceled If the emulation is configured for LF equals newline LF CR LF the paper advances one line at the current line space setting and the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 The paper position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing If the distance t
218. oot Super Set Commands 214 Remove Downloaded Characters Epson 184 Reset emulation P Series 40 Serial Matrix 94 Royal Mail 243 Select Attributes Proprinter XL 142 Select Font Print Mode Proprinter XL 143 Select Graphics Mode Epson 185 Select Italic Character Set Epson 186 Select Letter Gothic P Series XQ 72 Select Print Quality Epson 186 Select Proportional Spacing Proprinter XL 144 Select Serif or Sans Serif Font Epson 187 Select User Defined Font Epson 187 Select Vertical Tab Channel Epson 187 Select 9 Pin Graphics Mode Epson 186 Select Deselect Proportional Spacing Epson 187 Serial Matrix emulation control code description format 78 Serial Matrix VFU 278 Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position in 1 60 Inch Epson 188 309 Set and Reset Codes Epson 155 Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1 Epson 188 Set Forms Length by Lines Epson 190 Set Forms Length in Inches Epson 190 Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1 120 Inch Epson 188 Set Margin Left Epson 189 Set Margin Right Epson 189 Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in 1 120 Inch Epson 191 Set Vertical Tabs in Channels Epson 191 Single Density Bit Image Graphics Sample 263 Skip Over Perforation Epson 192 Serial Matrix 107 Skip Over Perforation Cancel Epson 192 Proprinter XL 124 Serial Matrix 108 Slew Speed Super Set Commands 215 Space P Series XQ 73 Special Function Code Proprinter XL 116 P Series 26 Serial Matri
219. op bits String Substitution Table Symbol set True Type style Typeface Typographic font S The sequential transmission of data in which each element is transferred in succession To turn on activate invoke or enable Special Function Control Character The first character in a printer command sequence In P Series emulation mode you can select one of five characters as the SFCC In the Serial Matrix or Proprinter protocols the SFCC must always be the ASCII ESC character See also command sequence A typeface with a heavy line thickness produced when the characters doublestrike just offset of the original characters See also character weight Compare with bold print Rapid vertical paper movement Super Set Control Code The SSCC is used to activate the super set commands It consists of the SFCC plus the sequence The signal that indicates the start of a character or element The signal that indicates the end of a character or element Two or more bytes of data or code treated as a unit A table that contains the code points within a character set that need to be changed for an international language See character set T On or 1 High true refers to a positive relative voltage representing the ON state low true refers to a negative relative voltage representing the ON state Refers to either the upright roman or italic character style within a specific font family A
220. ormally taken by two columns You can change graphics density with the ESC command Example following example produces quadruple density graphics of the pattern used in the standard density example The amount of data must be quadrupled for quadruple density the data are used 108 times rather than 27 QUAD DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS Half Speed Mode On Off ASCII Code ESC sn Hex Code 1B73n Dec Code 27115n Purpose Reduces printer speed 50 where hex 00 or 30 turns half speed mode off hex 01 or 31 turns half speed mode on Comment This command is ignored 174 Horizontal Tab Execute Horizontal Tab Execute ASCII Code HT Hex Code 09 Dec Code 9 Purpose Moves the logical print head to the next horizontal tab stop Comment Power on default horizontal tabs are set at every eighth character at the current character spacing Tab positions are not affected by a change of font or character width Blank spaces between HT stops are underlined in underline mode Horizontal Tab Set Release ASCII Code ESC D n1 nk NUL Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example 1B 44 n1 nk 00 27 68 n1 nk O Sets up to 32 horizontal tab positions n1 through n32 specify the character column of the tab positions NUL is the sequence terminator ESC D NUL clears all tabs The values of n must be listed in ascending order or they are ignored Tabs greater than 32 or those positione
221. ose Selects left n1 right n2 top n3 and bottom n4 form margins where n1 The width of the left margin hex value in character columns at the current cpi If the requested margin is larger than the current form width right margin the value is ignored n2 The width of the right margin hex value in character columns at the current cpi If the requested margin is larger than the current form width left margin the value is ignored n3 The length of the top margin hex value in character lines at the current If the requested margin is larger than the current form length bottom margin the value is ignored n4 The length of the bottom margin hex value in character lines at the current If the requested margin is larger than the current form length top margin the value is ignored Comment hex value of FF for n1 n2 n3 or n4 indicates that the margin remains unaffected When set the right and bottom margins take effect immediately The left margin takes effect for the current line only if no horizontal motion has occurred for the line otherwise it takes effect on the next line The top margin always takes effect on the next form 44 Line Feed Line Feed ASCII Code LF Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 0A 10 Prints the data in the buffer if any and advances the vertical character position one line at the current line space setting If configured for LF e
222. ough 0020 If a value for n is 0021 or greater 0020 is selected Print Mode ASCII Code SSCC n Hex Code SSCC21n Dec Code SSCC 33 Table 58 Print Mode n Value ASCII Meaning 0 Selects thermal transfer mode 1 Selects direct thermal mode Print Speed ASCII Code SSCCe1 n Hex Code SSCC 65 31 Dec Code SSCC 101 49 59 where speed of engine inches per second ranging from 0001 through 0099 All other values are ignored Reboot ASCII Code SSCC Q Hex Code SSCC 51 Dec Code SSCC 81 Purpose Reboots the printer 214 Print Engine Options Slew Speed ASCII Code SSCC n Hex Code SSCC 4E n Dec Code SSCC 78 where n slew speed in inches per second ranging from 01 through 99 All other values are ignored Tear Strip Time ASCII Code SSCC Hex Code SSCC22n Dec Code SSCC 34 Purpose When using tear off strip media handling this option sets the time in seconds with the buffer empty that the printer waits before it advances media to the tear off position where time in seconds range from 01 through 60 If the value of nis 61 or greater 60 is selected Vertical Image Shift ASCII Code SSCC v n Hex Code SSCC 76 2D n Dec Code SSCC 118 45 n Purpose Shifts image up or down in 1 1000 inches The brackets around the symbol indicate it is optional do not use these brackets in the command where shifts the image down No will shi
223. panel refer to your User s Guide 230 Code 128 Table 68 Code 128A Character Set Character Hex Character Hex Character Hex Character Hex NUL 00 SUB 1A 34 4E SOH 01 ESC 1B 35 AF STX 02 FS 1C 36 50 ETX 03 GS 1D 37 51 EOT 04 RS 1E 38 52 ENQ 05 US 1F 39 53 ACK 06 20 3A 54 BEL 07 21 3B 55 BS 08 22 3C 56 HT 09 23 3D 57 LF 0A 24 3E 58 VT 0B 25 3F 59 FF 0C 26 40 5A CR oD 27 41 5B SO 0E 28 42 5C SI OF 29 43 SD DLE 10 2A 44 5E 11 2B 45 B 5F 12 2C 46 FNC 3 See NOTE 13 2D 47 FNC 2 See NOTE 14 2 48 SHIFT See NOTE 15 2F 49 CODE C See NOTE 16 30 4A FUNC 4 See NOTE 17 31 4B CODE B See NOTE 18 32 4C FNC 1 See NOTE 19 33 4D START A STOP inet N Mm UD m O gt 2 A B C D E F G H mp euge 231 Chapter 7 Codes Table 69 Code 128B Character Set SP 20 T 54 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 21 3B 22 3C 23 3D 24 3E 25 3F 26 40 27 41 28 42 5C 29 43 5D 2A 44 5E 2B 45 5F 2C 46 60 20 47 61 2 48 62 2F 49 63 7D 30 4A 64 7E 31 4B 65 7F 32 4C 66 FNC 3 See NOTE 33 4D 67 FNC 2 See NOTE 34 4E 68 SHIFT See NOTE 35 4F i 69 CODE C See NOTE 36 50 j 6A FUNC 4 See NOTE 37 51 6B CODE A See NOTE 38 52 6C FNC 1 See NOTE 39 53 6D START B STOP 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B aci oe See O TF O 5 SS ISS Sh o mo c 10 i gt B G H J K L M N Q R S OMA
224. pattern bytes The values for n1 and n2 must be specified in the control code expression They are defined as follows n1 number of data bytes MOD 256 n2 INT number of data bytes 256 The modulus arithmetic operator MOD refers to the integer value that is the remainder of an integer division The INT operator refers to integer division and is denoted by the slash character Therefore n1 is the remainder of the number of data bytes divided by 256 and n2 is the integer value of the number of data bytes divided by 256 n1 number of data bytes n2 x 256 n2 number of data bytes 256 If the number of data bytes to be printed is less than 256 n2 equals zero and n1 equals the number of data bytes to be printed The following examples illustrate the procedure to determine the Bit Image program statement Print 450 data bytes single density n2 450 256 1 n1 450 1x256 194 The program statement is ESC K 194 1 DATA Print 700 data bytes single density n2 700 256 2 n1 700 2x256 700 512 188 The program statement is ESC K 188 2 DATA Print 180 data bytes single density n2 180 256 0 n1 180 0x256 180 0 180 The program statement is ESC K 180 0 DATA Bit Image Programming Format The number of data bytes and the n1 n2 definition must be equal If too few data bytes are sent printing does not begin until sufficient data is received Any characters following n1 and
225. plicable and possible Name The title or function of the command ASCII Code The standard ASCII name for the control code Hex Code code s numeric equivalent in hexadecimal Dec Code The code s numeric equivalent in decimal Purpose The function s of the control code Discussion A description of exceptions or limitations to normal use Example sample is provided for some control codes when it is possible to illustrate the effect of a control code or if a specific syntax is required to complete the program statement i e Horizontal Tab set Vertical Tab set clear If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that are defined in the control code description unpredictable results may occur Escape Control Code Header Serial Matrix codes use only ESC as the control code header For example to enable bold print in the Serial Matrix printer protocol use the Serial Matrix ESC and the bold print control code character G as follows Ascii ESC G Hex 1B 47 Dec 27 71 Attribute Set and Reset Codes Certain print attributes are set or reset turned on or off by using the appropriate ESC code sequence and the numbers 1 or 0 These may be either the hexadecimal code 01 and 00 or the ASCII code for the printable symbols of decimal 1 and 0 hexadecimal code 31 and 30 respectively Expanded Print Superscript Subscript Print and Underline are attributes which are set and reset in this fashion
226. print where if n 2 1 3 5 any odd value expanded print is selected if n 0 2 4 any even value expanded print is reset Comment When expanded print using ESC W is received all characters are printed double wide until reset by the expanded print reset control code or DC4 Also see control code SO Expanded Double Wide print for one line only Example The following sample illustrates expanded character printing and expanded character printing reset CONTROL CODE ESC W 1 SELECTS i EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE ESC W O RESETS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING 129 Chapter 5 130 Configuring the Proprinter 1 XL Emulation with Control Codes Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only ASCII Code SO ESC SO Hex Code OE 1B OE Dec Code 14 27 14 Purpose Selects double wide print for one line only where If the emulation is set at 10 cpi it is set to 5 cpi If the emulation is set at 12 cpi itis set to 6 cpi If the emulation is set at 17 1 cpi itis set to 8 55 cpi Comment This expanded print control code is a line by line print attribute when the SO control code is received the current line is printed double wide and automatically reset This control code can be reset by a paper motion control code LF VT CR etc by the DC4 double wide cancel code CAN or ESC W double wide print When set by SO double wide print is not cancelled by the Autowrap feature Example The following s
227. printer XL 133 Host Form Size 205 IBM Proprinter Ill XL overview See Proprinter IIl XL emulation 113 Image Width Super Set Commands 210 Index Control Code Epson 157 Proprinter XL 117 P Series 28 P Series XQ 64 Serial Matrix 79 Initialize Parameters Proprinter XL 134 Initialize Printer Epson 176 Interleaved 2 5 238 International Character Set Select Epson 162 P Series 37 Serial Matrix 90 International character sets Epson 162 Italic Printing Epson 176 Italic Printing Cancel Epson 176 L Landscape Page Orientation Super Set Commands 208 Line Feed Epson 177 Proprinter XL 136 P Series 45 P Series XQ 70 Serial Matrix 100 Line Feed n 216 Inch Epson 177 Line Feed n 216 Inch 1 line Proprinter XL 136 Serial Matrix 100 Line Spacing n 216 Inch Epson 180 Proprinter XL 140 P Series 50 Serial Matrix 103 Line Spacing n 288 Inch Super Set Commands 206 Line Spacing n 72 Inch Epson 179 Proprinter XL 139 P Series 49 Serial Matrix 102 Line Spacing 1 6 Inch Epson 178 Proprinter XL 137 P Series 46 Serial Matrix 101 Line Spacing 1 8 Inch Epson 178 Proprinter XL 138 P Series 47 Serial Matrix 101 Line Spacing 7 72 Inch Epson 179 P Series 48 Serial Matrix 102 Line Spacing 8 or 10 3 Ipi P Series 47 Linefeed Super Set Commands 210 Make 80 9F Hex Control Codes Epson 180 Make 80 9F Hex Printable Epson 180 Margins Proprinter XL 140 P Series 44 Se
228. producing dots For more information refer to Chapter 8 Graphics This mode prints double density with no adjacent dots It is similar to ESC L except that if the graphics data contain horizontally adjacent dots the data may print incorrectly This feature is widely used to move the print head precisely by printing blank dot columns The following example produces a double density double speed graphic image of the pattern used in the standard density example The amount of data must be doubled for double density the data are used 54 times rather than 27 DOUBLE DENSITY DOUBLE SPEED BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS NAAN AANA 173 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Graphics Quadruple Density ASCII Code ESC Z n1 n2 Hex Code 1B5An n2 Dec Code 27 90 n1 n2 Purpose Selects Quadruple Density Bit Image graphics of 240 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically where n1 256n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required DATA consist of 8 bit dot columns with the MSB at the top and 1 bits producing dots For more information refer to Chapter 8 Graphics Comment This mode is similar to ESC L except that four dot columns are printed in the space n
229. ption Factory Settings Characteristic Default Setting Orientation CPI LPI Typeface Proportional Spacing Bold Print Italic Print Slashed Zero Text Position Horizontal DPI Vertical DPI Logical Form Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Physical Page Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Perforation Skip Form Length Absolute Length Funct of LPI Form Width Absolute Width Funct of CPI Host Command Portrait 10 0 6 0 Letter Gothic Disable Disable Disable Disable Top of Line 120 DPI 72 DPI 0 characters 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces 0 inches 0 inches 0 inches 0 inches Disable 6 0 inches 36 lines 4 1 inches 41 lines Enabled 151 Chapter 6 152 Introduction Epson Emulation Exceptions and Differences Because of mechanical differences between your printer and Epson printers moving printhead serial matrix printers some Epson features are approximated or not supported Epson codes that produce different behavior in your printer are indicated by a dagger t in the Control Code Index and code section Epson bit image graphics are supported including all plotter and CRT densities Many character sets are available including IBM PC Graphics IBM Code Page 0437 and Epson You can configure the zero character to contain a slash or no slash Like the Epson FX 1050 the Double Wide print control codes E
230. puter via the host data stream Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the Serial Matrix control codes e The printer configuration menus You can modify a subset of the Serial Matrix emulation parameters using the control panel keys and LCD display as described in the User s Guide Control codes sent from a host system generally override previous settings that result from the configuration menus NOTE Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to the printer s NVRAM memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer or reset it to the factory default configuration The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the User s Guide To save the configuration using host control codes refer to Appendix B PTR_SETUP Option 75 Chapter 4 76 Introduction Serial Matrix Default Values and States The factory settings for the Serial Matrix emulation menu options are shown in Table 16 Table 17 lists additional factory settings for parameters provided by the ASCII Emulation formatting menus The EMULATION menu options are described in the User s Guide Host control codes can override many of the settings for these menu options Table 16 Serial Matrix Default Settings Characteristic Default Setting Control Code 06 Define CR Code Auto LF Overstrike Define LF Code Printer Select Alternate Set 80 9F Character Sets P
231. quals new line LF CR LF the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 of the new line Otherwise the logical print head does not move when configured for LF function only LFZLF ONLY The LF function cancels all single line print attributes such as double high elongated and double wide expanded characters This code is always configured for LF CR LF in the P Series protocol In the P Series Even Dot Plot mode high density graphics the LF code does not cause paper position motion the data in the buffer is plotted and the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 in anticipation of the Odd Dot Plot control code to complete high density graphic plotting In the P Series Odd Dot Plot mode normal density graphics the LF code plots the data in the buffer advances the paper position a single dot row at the current vertical dot density and positions the logical print head at character column 1 45 Chapter 2 _ Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi ASCII Code SFCC2 SFCC LPI n Hex Code SFCC 32 Dec Code SFCC 50 Purpose Sets line spacing to 6 or as set by SFCC A Comment For SFCC LPI n the value of n can be 6 or 8 only If n 6 this command sets line spacing to 1 6 inch Values of n other than 6 or 8 causes an error message Command Line Error Messages are listed in Table 2 on page 27 SFCC 2 asserts n 72 inch line spacing as set by SFCC
232. r Set Select P Series 42 P Series XQ 65 Print Condensed Proprinter XL 127 Condensed Reset Proprinter XL 127 Double Wide Proprinter XL 129 Reset Proprinter XL 130 1 line Proprinter XL 130 Emphasized Proprinter XL 128 Emphasized Reset Proprinter XL 128 Superscript Subscript Proprinter XL 144 Superscript Subscript Reset Proprinter XL 145 Print Count Super Set Commands 214 Print Intensity Super Set Commands 214 Print Mode Super Set Commands 214 Print Mode Pitch Selection P Series 52 Serial Matrix 104 Print Speed Super Set Commands 214 Printer Configuration 21 Printer Deselect Epson 183 Serial Matrix 107 Printer Protocol changing Super Set Commands 216 Printer Select Epson 184 Serial Matrix 107 Programming bit image format 262 P Series Plot Mode 268 Proportional Spacing Select Proprinter XL 144 Select Deselect Epson 187 Proprinter XL emulation configuring via control codes and menus 113 factory settings 114 150 overview 113 P Series emulation configuring via control codes and menus 23 control code description format 26 factory settings 24 60 76 P Series EVFU PI line disabled 276 PI line enabled 275 P Series EVFU See EVFU 273 P Series Plot Data Byte Format Sample 266 P Series Plot Mode How to Exit 269 P Series XQ emulation control code description format 62 factory settings 60 PSET 90 P Series 37 PTR SETUP Option 283 R Reassign Graphics Mode Epson 184 Reb
233. r and Royal 243 O tei 244 Telepori seite tp RR bibs EET BER ERR 245 CG EAN 128 1 ande e ueteri idee ee 246 251 252 Gai ete 255 URS nca ep e v teen loto 256 8 E 257 INTOGUCTION ER 257 Bit Image Graphics ssssssssssseseeeeeeeeen nnne 258 Plotting a Bit Image Pattern see 259 Bit Image Densily ieri aret RE eria ed 261 Bit Image Programming 262 P Series Compatible Plot Mode Odd Even Dot Plotting 264 Plot Density cese etai E deed ede HERD e Re 264 Plot Data Byte Format iere bre 265 Plot Data Line Format n 266 Plotting the Data n cere re ree donnes 268 To Exit the P Series Plot Mode 269 Combining Graphics and Text sss 269 9 Vertical Page Formatting 271 INTOQUCTION Lc 271 General P Series EVFU Programming Information 271 VFU Load Save Clear sse 272 P Series EVEU os cete E td ets 273 Start Load Code Hex 1E or 6E 273 Channel 55 0
234. r in the data stream selects the print mode at which that line prints Different pitches can be printed on the same line Table 6 Print Modes Pitches Available Using P Series OSET ECMA Latin 1 Extended Character Set Only n Print Mode Pitch Select 0 Barcode Letter Gothic 10 cpi 1 Multinational Letter Gothic 10 cpi 2 Multinational Letter Gothic 12 cpi 3 Multinational Courier 10 cpi 4 Greek Letter Gothic 10 cpi 5 Greek Letter Gothic 12 cpi 6 Greek Courier 10 cpi 7 Graphics Letter Gothic 10 cpi 8 Graphics Courier 10 cpi 9 Scientific Letter Gothic 10 cpi 10 Scientific Letter Gothic 12 cpi 11 Scientific Courier 10 cpi 12 Multinational at Primary Character Set Mode and Pitch 36 Character Set Select International Languages Character Set Select International Languages ASCII Code SFCC PSET n SFCCRn Hex Code SFCC 52n Dec Code SFCC82n Purpose Specifies the international language set identified by n in the basic character set selected from the control panel ECMA 94 Latin 1 IBM PC Multinational and DEC Multinational where n corresponds to the language as shown in Table 7 Table 7 International Character Sets Character Set Selected ECMA Latini Pod or Multinational GONE 0 ASCII USA ASCII USA ASCII USA ASCII USA 1 German French EBCDIC French 2 Swedish German German 3 Danish English UK English UK 4 Norwegian Danish Norw Danish 5 Finnish Swedish Sw
235. r perform a carriage return function only or a carriage return and line feed based on the configuration for the CR function P Series XQ Default Values and States The factory settings for the P Series XQ emulation menu options are shown in Table 12 Table 12 also lists additional factory settings for parameters provided by the ASCII Emulation formatting menus The EMULATION menu options are described in the User s Guide Host control codes can override many of the settings for these menu options Table 12 P Series Default Settings Characteristic Default Setting Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Horizontal DPI Vertical DPI Prop Spacing Italic Print Slashed Zero Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Print Char Set Define CR code Auto LF Define LF code Advanced User Control Code 06 Compressed Print Bold Elong Alt Font 10 0 CPI 6 0 LPI Letter Gothic 120 DPI 72 DPI Enable Disable Disable 0 characters 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces CR CR Disable LF CR LF 8 0 LPI Char 01 SOH Disable Elng BS Font SO P Series XQ Default Values and States Table 12 P Series Default Settings Characteristic Default Setting Gothic Typeface EVFU Select Upr Case Select Slew Relative Text Position Host Command Reset Cmd CFG Ld Form Length Form Length Form Length Form Width Form Width Form Width Char 02 STX Enable Disable 1 to 15 lines
236. r printing Comment Character graphics IBM graphic set hex BO through DF and FO through FE cannot be italicized ESC 4 TURNS ON ITALIC CHARACTER PRINTING ESC 5 TURNS OFF ITALIC CHARACTER PRINTING Italic Printing Cancel ASCII Code ESC 5 Hex Code 1B35 Dec Code 2753 Purpose Turns off italic character printing 176 Line Feed Line Feed ASCII Code LF Hex Code Dec Code Purpose 0A 10 Prints the data in the buffer if any and advances the vertical character position a distance of one line at the current line spacing Comment The logical print head keeps the same distance from the margin The current line is printed and the logical printhead moves down a distance equal to the current line spacing If there are no dots paper moves and no printing occurs When possible successive line feeds are accumulated and moved at once This code cancels all one line only emphasis and font selections double wide from SO and ESC SO and unidirectional printing from ESC Line Feed n 216 Inch ASCII Code ESC J n Hex Code 1 4 Dec Code 27 74 Purpose Immediately advances the paper n 216 inch where n 0 through 255 Comment 7 0 is ignored Paper movement occurs in multiples of 3 216 inch This command produces an immediate line feed but does not affect line spacing or produce a carriage return Any one line only print attributes in effect are canceled Small values of n may result in overlapping lines
237. r rapid vertical paper movement slewing during repetitive printing tasks The EVFU is a software controlled vertical formatter It allows you to preprogram frequently used lines on forms and documents for efficient paper handling in merging operations such as invoicing or payrolling By flagging each line to be printed the EVFU automatically slews the paper rapidly advances the paper to the identified lines The EVFU provides 14 or 16 channels to identify up to 192 lines depending on the paper instruction The EVFU also allows you to slew a specific number of lines on the form General P Series EVFU Programming Information A vertical format unit provides an efficient way to move the paper position during repetitive printing tasks The type of VFU used is a configuration option selected from the control panel If not used the VFU option should be disabled from the control panel The general VFU programming procedure is 1 Design a form determining spacing and channel assignments for each line 2 Sendthe programming sequence to the printer The sequence depends on the type of VFU used Some VFUS require the PI signal line normally associated with the Dataproducts parallel interface Note that data bit 8 of the standard RS 232 interface can also be configured for use as the PI line The following information applies when programming and using a Vertical Format Unit Elongated Characters Elongated double high characters c
238. r the QUANTITY data Form Line Form Data Number Vertical Tabs Top of Form Part Number Part Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Quantity Figure 37 Sample Serial Matrix Vertical Tab Positions 279 Chapter 9 _ Serial Matrix VFU 280 Standard ASCII Character Set B7 Bi BITS B5 KEY B4 B3 B2 B1 OCTAL DECIMAL HEX o o COLUMN 2 r ijo QOO E mee o A a ejyoars x o 25 o N AR o monmv o N R o A gio 9 N R 9 am E o N o oo BR RO NI Oo R oa RS o o Ae E o o o ARO o OG 0 25 21 Jo 15 NI aw A a o R o o RO ES 2 oo 2 D Q o B o o N AR N ao an do wo 4 A N o E 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 14 5 5 5 7 7 T 10 8 8 EI BN a oo AN ow m a N NI N SRN lo Ilo HE ENS 28 2 28 AN EG 2569 85 a u wo a w ES DS a SS N Az a A er Az A R n AR JON N wo eo e o o8 Em e a a o NIL moo zi a O a foun a fouui Alor Ajo gt
239. re with relative line slewing the paper is moved 1 lines rather than n lines See Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting beginning on page 271 for more information on relative line slewing When using small line spacing and the lines overlap an unexpected print format may result Example following sample illustrates elongated character printing CONTROL CODE ESC h SELECTS ELONGATED CHARACTER PRINTING FOR ONE LINE ONLY 38 Elongated Double High Print Set Reset Elongated Double High Print Set Reset ASCII Code SFCC w n Hex Code SFCC77n Dec Code 119 Purpose Turns double high character printing and off Double high characters are standard width but twice as high where n 1 or 49 hex 01 or hex 31 turns double high printing on n 0 or 48 hex 00 or hex 30 turns double high printing off Discussion The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in double high NOTE It is recommended to use double Line Feeds and Carriage Returns when double high character printing is on after an SFCC w control code has been sent or else the printer will overstrike text that has already printed If Superscript Subscript SFCC S is combined with Double High printing only Double High printing will occur Example The following sample illustrates double high character printing CONTROL CODE ESC w 1 SELECTS DOUBLE HIGH PRINTING ESC w 0 CANCELS DOUBLE HIGH PRINTING 39 Chapter 2 _ Configur
240. rial Matrix 98 Master Print Select Epson 182 Maxicode 239 Media Handling Super Set Commands 211 Media Sensor Super Set Commands 211 MSI 241 N Normal Density Graphics P Series 51 Normal Density Plot Sample 264 Odd Dot Plot P Series 51 Odd Dot Plot Pattern Plan 268 Odd Dot Plot Sample 268 Odd Even Dot Plotting 264 Offline Super Set Commands 211 OSET P Series 36 Overscoring Proprinter XL 141 P Series 50 Serial Matrix 103 307 Page Eject software Super Set Commands 216 Page Orientation landscape Super Set Commands 208 Page Orientation portrait Super Set Commands 208 Page Orientation selecting Super Set Commands 207 Paper Cut Super Set Commands 212 Paper Feed Shift Super Set Commands 212 Paper Length Super Set Commands 212 Paper Out Detection Disable Epson 183 Paper Out Detection Enable Epson 182 Pass Bit 7 from Host Epson 183 PCX Data 206 PDF 417 242 Perforation Skip Over Epson 192 Serial Matrix 107 Pitch character 12 cpi Proprinter XL 126 Plot Data 268 Data Line Format 266 Odd Dot Pattern Plan 268 Odd Dot Sample 268 Truncated Character Line 269 Plot Attributes Super Set Commands 213 Plot Density P Series 264 Plot Mode Odd Even dot plotting 264 308 P Series compatible 264 PMODE 104 P Series 52 Portrait Orientation Super Set Commands 208 Postbar 243 POSTNET 244 structure 244 Power Saver Time Super Set Commands 213 Primary Characte
241. rimary Subset Extended Subset 8 0 LPI CR CR Enable Enable LF LF Disable Control Code IBM PC ASCII USA Code Page 437 Serial Matrix Default Values and States Table 17 ASCII Emulation Menu Option Factory Settings Characteristic Default Setting Orientation CPI LPI Typeface Proportional Spacing Bold Print Italic Print Slashed Zero Text Position Horizontal DPI Vertical DPI Logical Form Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Physical Page Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Perforation Skip Form Length Absolute Length Funct of LPI Form Width Absolute Width Funct of CPI Host Command Portrait 10 0 6 0 Letter Gothic Disable Disable Disable Disable Top of Line 120 DPI 72 DPI 0 characters 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces 0 inches 0 inches 0 inches 0 inches Disable 6 0 inches 36 lines 4 1 inches 41 characters Enabled 77 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes IMPORTANT 78 The remainder of this chapter describes the Serial Matrix printer control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer in order to configure and invoke numerous printer functions Format for Control Code Descriptions The following information is listed for each code function where ap
242. rint Mode Pitch Selection ssseee 104 Printer 107 Pririter Selectzc ids eode e red opo 107 Skip Over 107 Skip Over Perforation Cancel 108 Superscript Subscript Printing sssseeeees 108 Superscript Subscript Printing Reset 108 Super Set Commands sess 109 Underline aae eee endum 109 Vertical Tab ete dede Ede Rage ER Ee id 110 Vertical Tab Set Clear essen 111 5 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Printer Protocol 113 UGTION e UE 113 Proprinter XL Emulation Default Settings 114 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Gornitrol GodeS itii ei tp Unidas uriss 116 Escape Control Code 116 Attribute Set and Reset Codes sssssssssseee 116 Control Code 1 117 Backspace aie teet tas ae tette 118 119 Bit Image Mode Single Density esses 119 Bit Image Mode Double 120 Bit Image Mode Double Density Double Speed
243. rint attributes are set and reset turned on or off by using the appropriate SFCC code sequence and the numbers 1 or 0 These may be either the hexadecimal code 01 and 00 or the ASCII code for the printable symbols of decimal 1 and 0 hexadecimal code 31 and 30 respectively Expanded Print Superscript Subscript Print and Underline are attributes that are set and reset this way 27 Chapter 2 28 Control Code Reference Index Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes This index lists each printer command by function ASCII mnemonic and the page where the command is explained in detail The rest of this chapter defines the control code functions for P Series Emulation mode The commands are listed in alphabetical order NOTE Some control code functions can be accomplished using another control code sequence or via control panel selection FUNCTION Paper Motion Form Feed Line Feed Vertical Tab Page Format Backspace Carriage Return Forms Length Set Inches Forms Length Set Lines Form Margins Set Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi Line Spacing 8 or 10 3 Ipi 1 line only Line Spacing 7 72 Inch Line Spacing n 72 Inch Line Spacing n 216 Inch VFU Commands Print Attributes Bold Print Bold Print 1 line only Bold Print Reset Elongated Double High Print 1 line Elongated Double High Print Set Reset Emphasized Print Emphasized Print Reset Expand
244. rinter XL 145 TrueType Font Selection 203 Truncated Character Line 269 U UCC EAN 128 246 application identifiers 247 Underline Epson 194 Proprinter XL 146 P Series 56 P Series XQ 73 Serial Matrix 109 Unidirectional Printing ESC U Proprinter control code 146 Unidirectional Printing Set Reset Epson 194 Unidirectional Printing 1 line Epson 194 UPC Shipping 255 UPC A 251 UPC E 252 UPS 11 256 V Vertical Data Byte Pattern Sample 258 259 Vertical Format Units EVFU 273 Vertical Image Shift Super Set Commands 215 Vertical Tab Proprinter XL 146 P Series 57 P Series XQ 74 Serial Matrix 110 Vertical Tab Set Clear Proprinter XL 147 Serial Matrix 111 Vertical Tab Execute Epson 195 Vertical Tab Set Clear Epson 195 VFU Commands P Series 57 VFU Load Save Clear 272 Z T non standard Epson code 152 311 312 Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You IBM 4400 Series Thermal Printer User s Guide Publication No G544 5733 01 Overall how satisfied are you with the information in this book Very Satisfied Satisfied Neutral Dissatisfied Very Dissatisfied Overall satisfaction How satisfied are you that the information in this book is Very Satisfied Satisfied Neutral Dissatisfied Very Dissatisfied Accurate Complete Easy to find
245. ript until reset by the superscript subscript reset control code or printer reset Emphasized print is ignored in the superscript subscript print mode When the BS feature is enabled from the control panel both superscript and subscript characters can be printed in the same character column using the Backspace BS control code page 30 Caution should be used when combining Superscript or Subscript printing with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High or small line spacing overlapping lines may occur Characters with different horizontal or vertical dot densities do not overlap The following sample illustrates superscript subscript printing CONTROL CODE ESC S 0 SELECTS SUPERSCRIPT A2 B2 C2 CONTROL CODE ESC S 1 SELECTS SUBSCRIPT CONTROL CODE ESC T CANCELS SUPERSCRIPT SUBSCRIPT PRINTING Superscript Subscript Printing Reset ASCII Code SFCC T Hex Code Dec Code Purpose SFCC 54 SFCC 84 Resets superscript and subscript printing 55 Chapter 2 _ Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Super Set Commands ASCII Code SFCC Hex Code 7C 7D Dec Code SFCC 124 125 59 Purpose Control code sequence used to introduce the super set commands Comment Super set commands affect the ASCII Emulation as a whole regardless of the printer protocol currently active The commands are sent from the host in the data stream to the printer and provide the following
246. rm are ignored Forms length is defined in inches therefore subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command Values of n greater than 24 are ignored When forms length is set by an ESC C NUL sequence the skip over perforation set by ESC N is cancelled This control code overrides forms length set at the operator panel 190 Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in n 120 Inch Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in n 120 Inch ASCII Code ESC n1 n2 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 1B 5 n1 n2 27 92 2 Moves the logical print head to a relative horizontal print position using 1 120 inch increments Adds n1 256n2 120 inches to the horizontal position of the logical print head The number sent is two s complement with negative numbers moving to the left The command is ignored if it would move the logical print head beyond the page margins Set Vertical Tabs in Channels ASCII Code ESC b c n1 n2 n3 nk NUL Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment 1B62cn1 n2n3 nk 00 27 98 2 0 Assigns vertical tabs to channels selected by ESC see page 187 c 0 through 7 0 through 255 n1 through nk specify the line number for the vertical tab s up to a maximum of 16 tab positions NUL must end the sequence Channels are selected by ESC The distance of each tab stop from TOF is the current line spacing times the number of li
247. rol codes Emulation refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language A printer control language is the coding System used to convey manipulate and print data It contains character codes and command sequences that configure the emulation In the Proprinter IIl XL emulation mode your printer can print files coded for the Proprinter III XL printer control language To select the Proprinter emulation as the active printer emulation select ASCII Emulation from the EMULATION menu and Proprinter III XL from the Printer Protocol menu as described in the User s Guide The Proprinter III XL emulation provides many configurable parameters The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 25 You can modify these parameter values in two ways The Proprinter IIl XL host control codes An extensive set of Proprinter Ill XL control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the Proprinter IIl XL control code commands printer configuration menus You can modify a subset of the Proprinter IIl XL emulation parameters using the printer configuration menus control panel keys and LCD as described in the User s Guide Control codes sent from a host system generally override previous settings that result from the configuration menus NOTE Configuration values selected fr
248. rpose Causes printing to occur in only one direction of shuttle movement left to right Comment The printer ignores this command 194 Vertical Tab Execute Vertical Tab Execute ASCII Code VT Hex Code 0B Dec Code 11 Purpose Advances the logical print head to the next vertical tab position Comment selected by ESC If no vertical channel was selected channel 0 is used If no vertical tabs were set the paper advances one line The logical print head moves to the left margin If a tab position is on the current line the paper is moved to the next tab position If there are no tab positions between the current line and the end of the form the paper is moved to the top of the next form This code cancels all one line only emphasis and font controls double wide from SO and ESC SO and unidirectional printing from ESC Vertical Tab Set Clear ASCII Code ESC B n1 n2 n3 nk NUL Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment 1B 42 n1 n2 n3 nk 00 27 66 n1 n2 n3 nk 0 Sets up to 16 vertical tab positions 1 through 255 1 through 16 n1 through nk specify the line numbers for the vertical tab s up to a maximum of 16 tab positions NUL must end the sequence To clear the tab settings send ESC B NUL 1B 42 00 The values of n range from 1 through 255 hex 01 through FF and must be in ascending order The distance of each tab stop from TOF is the current line spacing times the num
249. rs are placed in the same position on the line those characters are printed in bold double strike print when the Overstrike Mode is enabled from the control panel If the DEFINE CR CODE submenu displays Define CR Code CR CR LF control code CR is converted to perform a carriage return and line feed function The CR code in Serial Matrix printer protocol cancels expanded double wide print when set by code SO and ESC SO single line printing attribute Character Pitch 10 cpi ASCII Code ESC P Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 1B 50 27 80 Sets character pitch to 10 cpi Control Code ESC X can also be used to select a character pitch of 10 cpi See Print Mode Pitch Selection on page 104 85 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Character Pitch 12 cpi ASCII Code ESC M ESC Hex Code 1B 4D 1B 3A Dec Code 2777 27 58 Purpose Sets character pitch to 12 cpi Comment Control Code ESC X can also be used to select a character pitch of 12 cpi See Print Mode Pitch Selection on page 104 Character Set Select ASCII Code ESC I xyz lowercase L Hex Code 1B 6 xyz Dec Code 27 108 xyz Purpose Selects the character set extended character set and the international language for a specific character set where X is the character set Table 18 y is the international language for the selected character set Table 19 Z is the extended character s
250. rscript Subscript ESC S or Condensed Print 51 is combined with Double High printing only Double High printing occurs Example The following sample illustrates double high character printing CONTROL CODE ESC w 1 SELECTS DOUBLE HIGH PRINTING ESC w 0 CANCELS DOUBLE HIGH PRINTING Double Strike ASCII Code ESC G Hex Code 1B47 Dec Code 27 71 Purpose Makes text bolder by selecting a bold font Comment This command makes text bolder by selecting a bold font Example The following sample illustrates bold character printing CONTROL CODE ESC G SELECTS BOLD CHARACTER PRINTING FOR EXAMPLE AaBbCcDdEeFfGgHhI iJ jKkL 1MmNnOoPp CONTROL CODE ESC H CANCELS BOLD CHARACTER PRINTING 165 Chapter 6 166 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Double Strike Cancel ASCII Code ESC H Hex Code 1B 48 Dec Code 27 72 Purpose Turns off the double strike printing set by ESC G or ESC Comment This control code resets only the double strike print attribute Other print attributes such as double wide printing are not affected Double Wide Print ASCII Code ESC W n Hex Code 1B57n Dec Code 2787n Purpose Turns double wide print on and off where hex 1 or hex 31 turns double wide print on hex 0 or hex 30 turns double wide print off Comment When ESC W is received all characters are printed twice as wide until reset This command overrides SO ESC SO and DC4 The OCR A and OCR B
251. s 132 Horizontal Tab Set Reset Horizontal Tab Set Reset ASCII Code ESC D n1 n2 nk NUL Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example 1B 44 n1 n2 nk 00 27 68 n1 n2 nk O Sets up to 28 horizontal tab positions n1 through n28 specify the character column of the tab positions NUL is the sequence terminator Up to 28 different tab positions may be set The values must be listed in ascending order or they are ignored The physical tab position is the product of n and the current cell width 1 pitch excluding double wide Tabs in excess of 28 or those positioned beyond the paper s right margin are also ignored Tab positions may be cleared by sending the ESC D NUL sequence Powering the printer on off initializes the tabs to every eighth character column Horizontal tabs are accessed by control code HT The following example illustrates horizontal tab setting and accessing CONTROL CODE ESC D CHR CA CHR C10 D CHR COD SETS TAB STOPS AT COLUMNS 4 AND 10 CONTROL CODE HT ACCESSES THE TAB STOPS AS FOLLOWS COLUMN 4 COLUMN 10 Horizontal Vertical Tabs Clear ASCII Code ESC R Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 1B 52 27 82 Clears all horizontal and vertical tab stops Horizontal tab stops are reinitialized to every 8 columns starting at column 1 i e 1 9 17 133 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Initialize Parameters ASCII Co
252. s 52 Print Mode Pitch Selection Table 8 Print Mode and Pitch SFCC PMODE n Print Mode and Pitch Oo oa A C Letter Gothic 10 cpi Letter Gothic 12 cpi Letter Gothic 15 cpi Courier 10 cpi Letter Gothic 10 cpi OCR A 10 cpi OCR B 10 cpi Table 9 Print Mode and Pitch SFCC nq n Print Mode and Pitch 1 hex 31 Courier 10 cpi 2 hex 32 Letter Gothic 10 cpi 3 hex 33 Letter Gothic 12 cpi 4 hex 34 Letter Gothic 12 cpi 5 hex 35 Letter Gothic 13 cpi Table 10 Horizontal and Vertical Dot Density SFCC X mn m jr Vertical Density Print Mode 0 30 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 1 31 X dpi y dpi Courier 2 32 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 3 33 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 4 34 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 5 35 X dpi y dpi OCR A 6 36 X dpi y dpi OCR B 7 87 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 8 38 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic The hex values shown i e 0 and 30 are equal Either value can be used in your program expression The density dpi remains the same under this setting x and y represent the resolutions of the particular printer 53 Chapter 2 _ Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Table 11 Print Mode and Character Pitches SFCC X mn Characters Per Inch value of n value of m Print Mode Gothic Courier Gothic Gothic Gothic OCR A Gothic Gothic 0 30 1 31 2 32 3 33 4 34 5 35
253. s denoted by an asterisk in this publication are trademarks of IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both IBM Proprinter The following terms denoted by a double asterisk in this publication are trademarks of other companies ANSI American National Standards Institute Inc CG Triumvirate Agfa Division Miles Incorporated Agfa Dataproducts Dataproducts Corporation DEC Digital Equipment Corporation Epson Seiko Epson Corporation Hewlett Packard Hewlett Packard Company IGP Printronix Inc LaserJet Hewlett Packard Company Printronix Printronix Inc POSTNET United States Postal Service UPS United Parcel Service of America Inc Table of Contents 1 OVeTVIGW e caca uo cage 17 Introd ctiO Man cc 17 About This Manua h a ror tire erepti c ht dns 17 Notes And Notices nnne nnn 18 Software Fealures 2 een teet dte ghe ese de 20 Printer Configuration essssssseeeeenenn een 21 2 P Series Printer 23 Introductionis ope nsa Dea ERN 23 P Series Default Values and 24 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes 26 Format for Control Code 26 Special Function Control Code Control Code Header 26 Command
254. s can be printed in the same character column using the Backspace BS control code page 118 Caution should be used when combining Superscript or Subscript printing with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High or small line spacing overlapping lines may occur Characters with different horizontal or vertical dot densities do not overlap Example The following sample illustrates superscript subscript printing CONTROL CODE ESC 5 0 SELECTSSUPERSCKRIPT A2 B2 C2 CONTROL CODE ESC S 1 SELECTSsusscript 3lugx749pec CONTROL CODE ESC T CANCELS SUPERSCRIPT SUBSCRIPT PRINTING 144 Superscript Subscript Printing Reset Superscript Subscript Printing Reset ASCII Code ESC T Hex Code 1B54 Dec Code 2784 Purpose Resets superscript and subscript printing as set by ESC S Super Set Commands ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1 7 7D Dec Code 27 12412559 Purpose Control code sequence used to introduce the super set commands Comment Super set commands affect the ASCII Emulation as a whole regardless of the printer protocol currently active The commands are sent from the host in the data stream to the printer and provide the following capabilities e Select a printer protocol e Change the page orientation Define various font attributes including typeface and point size e Select proportional fonts See Chapter 7 Super Set Programming for further information on the Super Set commands Top of
255. s code SI all characters are printed condensed approximately 6096 of the width of normal characters until the printer is reset by ESC M ESC P DC2 a printer reset or a new print mode control code SI code hex OF is equivalent to the ESC SI code If condensed print is not allowed in the current font this code is ignored Proportionally spaced text cannot be condensed Proportional spacing overrides condensed printing When condensed print is selected the following character pitches become effective e 10 cpi condenses to 17 1 cpi 10 12 and 15 cpi condense to 17 1 cpi e 12 and 15 cpi condense to 20 t This control code condenses character width but not inter character spacing An actual Epson FX 1050 printer condenses both character width and spacing If Condensed Print is combined with Double High ESC w printing only Double High printing occurs Example This sample shows condensed character printing and reset CONTROL CODE SI SELECTS CONDENSED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE DC2 RESETS CONDENSED CHARACTER PRINTING 163 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Condensed Print Reset ASCII Code DC2 Hex Code 12 Dec Code 18 Purpose Cancels the condensed print mode set by SI ESC SI or the operator panel Comment This returns the printer to the font that was active before condensed print occurred Other print attributes are not affected Example See the Condensed Print contro
256. s positioned at character column one Subsequent printable data preceding a paper motion command replace previous printable data including underlines Two exceptions apply Subsequent underlined characters hex 5F overlay the previous data e Subsequent space characters hex 20 only index the character position indicator to the right This code can occur at any place in the datastream and is acted upon immediately With CR CR LF the underline add delete and edit functions are disabled and the code is processed as a line feed See the Line Feed command description on page 70 for more information 66 Compressed Print Compressed Print ASCII Code SOH ETX HT Hex Code 01 03 09 Dec Code 1 3 9 NOTE Configure this feature from the control panel Purpose Selects compressed character printing Comment Use any of the three codes to select 17 1 cpi if you are configuring the printer from the operator control panel Both ETX and HT also select the Letter Gothic DP font if the printer is configured from the control panel see page 72 These commands can occur anywhere in the datastream and are acted upon immediately affecting the entire current print line Line spacing may be selected either through the control panel or by line spacing control codes The control code setting overrides the control panel line spacing setting Example IF THE COMPRESSED PRINT OPTION IS INSTALLED CONTROL CODE 01 HEX SELECTS
257. s two bytes of graphic data for every column of print Each column is sent as a pair d1 d3 a k 1 set the top 8 bits of a normal dot column just like ESC a2 d4 dk set the ninth dot in the column the most significant bit just below the bottom most dot of columns a7 d3 a k 1 Select Print Quality ASCII Code ESC x n Hex Code 1B78n Dec Code 27120n Purpose Selects print quality Comment This command is ignored on thermal printers 186 Select Deselect Proportional Spacing Select Deselect Proportional Spacing ASCII Code ESC p n Hex Code 1B70n Dec Code 27 112 where nis an integer n 0 Off 1 Purpose proportional mode on and off Select Serif or Sans Serif Font ASCII Code ESC kn Hex Code 1B6Bn Dec Code 27107n Purpose Selects a Courier font t where if n 0 2 4 any even value the font selected is a serif Courier font Courier instead of standard Epson Roman if n 2 1 3 5 any odd value the font selected is a sans serif Courier font ESC n SELECTS SERIF OR SANS SERIF NLQ CCOURIER FONTS FOR EXAMPLE THIS FONT HAS A SERIF THIS FONT DOES NOT HAVE A SERIF Select User Defined Font ASCII Code ESC n Hex Code 1B25n Dec Code 2737n Purpose Selects a user defined font TComment The printer ignores this command and removes all font data sent from the data stream Select Vertical Tab Channel ASCII Code ESC c Hex Code 1
258. saved VFU was loaded using the 6 or 8 Ipi DVFU or NVFU Start Load code Save From the control panel VFU TABLE SAVE writes the current VFU table into Non Volatile memory Skip over perforation and forms length values are not saved from this selection Clear The VFU can be cleared by any of the following e Pressing ENTER at the VFU TABLE CLEAR configuration menu e Sending a Reset control code in the printer data stream e Changing the printer protocol e Changing VFUs e Loading parameters e Loading a new VFU format When DISABLE is selected as the VFU type the previously loaded VFU data is not cleared and is still in effect if reselected 272 Start Load Code Hex 1E or 6E P Series EVFU The EVFU may be selected in the P Series and P Series XQ protocols The EVFU provides 14 or 16 channels to identify up to 192 lines depending on the paper instruction The programming sequence is 1 Sendthe start load code 2 Sendthe line identification codes 3 Sendthe end load code Start Load Code Hex 1E or 6E The start load code clears and initializes the EVFU memory for the memory load program The start load code is hex 1E when the PI signal line is disabled low or hex 6E when the PI line is enabled high Channel Assignment The EVFU memory has the capacity for 192 line forms The first line identification code channel code in the memory load program defines the first line on the form the second li
259. scale Figure 14 Sample FIMC Bar Code 237 Chapter 7 Codes Interleaved 2 5 1 2 5 and German I 2 5 The Interleaved 2 5 and German 1 2 5 bar code structure is shown in Figure 15 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT 1 UPPER GUARD BAND 1 1 1 QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET ZONE CODE CODE ZoNE HEIGHT J LOWER GUARD BAND 1 1 L 4J OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 15 Interleaved 2 5 and German I 2 5 Structure SR SC POSITION mm me Te 1 Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning Both start and stop codes contain bars and spaces They are automatically produced Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent numeric characters The structure is 2 wide elements bars or spaces and 3 narrow elements In the bar code two characters are interleaved paired bars are used to represent the first character in the pair and spaces are used to represent the second character in the pair While Interleaved 2 5 has a variable data field German 1 2 5
260. sity the data is used 108 times rather than 27 QUAD DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS 122 Bold Print Set Bold Print Set ASCII Code ESC G Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example 1B 47 27 71 Selects bold character printing When the bold character printing control code is received all characters are printed in bold until reset by the bold print reset control code or printer reset Bold Print is the same as printing double strike The following sample illustrates bold character printing CONTROL CODE ESC G SELECTS BOLD CHARACTER PRINTING FOR EXAMPLE AaBbCcDdEeFfGgHhI iJ jKkL 1MmNnOoPp CONTROL CODE ESC H CANCELS BOLD CHARACTER PRINTING Bold Print Cancel ASCII Code ESC H Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 1B 48 27 72 Cancels bold printing No other print attributes are changed 123 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Bottom Margin Set ASCII Code ESC n Hex Code 1 4 Dec Code 27 78 Purpose Selects the number of lines at the current line spacing for the paper skip at the bottom of the perforated page where 1 through 255 hex 01 through hex FF to select the number of lines to skip If the value of n exceeds the current forms length it is ignored Comment The actual distance set is the product of n and the current line spacing Factory default value disables bottom margin The current default value may be set by the
261. ssed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment For detailed information see the Bit Image section in Chapter 8 Example The following example produces Double Density Bit Image graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image Mode example Note that the amount of data must be doubled for double density the data is used 54 times rather than 27 DOUBLE DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS 1 Bit Image Mode Double Density Double Speed ASCII Code ESC Y n1 n2 Hex Code 1 59 7 2 Dec Code 27 89 7 2 Purpose Selects Double Density Double Speed Image graphics where n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment For detailed information see the Bit Image section in Chapter 8 Example The following example produces Double Density Double Speed Bit Image graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image Mode example Note that the amount of data must be doubled for double density the data is used 54 times rather than 27 DOUBLE DENSITY DOUBLE SPEED BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS NANA AANA 82 Bit Image Mode Quadrupl
262. t P Series 39 Serial Matrix 93 Elongated Print 1 line P Series 38 Serial Matrix 92 Emphasized Print Epson 168 Proprinter XL 128 P Series 40 Serial Matrix 93 303 Emphasized Print Reset Proprinter XL 128 P Series 40 Serial Matrix 94 Emphasized Print Cancel Epson 168 Emulation Reset P Series 40 Serial Matrix 94 Enable Printing Hex 00 1F and 80 9F Epson 169 End Load Code EVFU 274 Epson configuration overview 154 Epson FX control codes grouped by function 157 Epson FX 1050 emulation chapter overview 149 character set 153 control code description format 154 control codes Backspace BS 159 Bell BEL 160 Cancel Line CAN 160 Carriage Return CR 160 Character Pitch 10 cpi ESC P 161 Character Pitch 12 cpi ESC M 161 Character Pitch 15 cpi ESC g 161 Character Set Select International Languages ESC 162 Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0 ESC 163 Condensed Print Reset DC2 164 Condensed Print SI ESC SI 163 Cut Sheet Paper Feed Control ESC EM 164 Define a Download Character ESC amp 164 Delete Character DEL 164 Double High Print Set Reset ESC w 165 Double Strike ESC G 165 Double Strike Cancel ESC H 166 Double Wide Print 1 Line SO 167 304 Double Wide Print ESC W 166 Double Wide Print 1 Line Cancel DC4 167 Emphasized Print ESC E 168 Emphasized Print Cancel ESC F 168 Enable Printing Hex 00 1F and 80 9F ESC 1
263. t Select activated by SFCC 6 This feature is also selectable from the control panel see the Alternate Set 80 9F parameter in the configuration chapter of your User s Guide Characters 80 9F Printable Symbols ASCII Code SFCC 6 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment SFCC 36 SFCC 54 Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 through 9F are printable symbols This feature is also selectable from the control panel see the Alternate Set 80 9F parameter in the configuration chapter of your User s Guide 35 Chapter 2 _ Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Character Set Select ECMA 94 Latin 1 Extended ASCII Code SFCC OSET n Purpose Selects the Extended Character Set and the print mode and pitch at which the extended character prints Valid only in the ECMA 94 Latin 1 Extended Character Set otherwise this command is ignored Comment nranges from 0 through 12 hex 00 through hex OC to select the print mode pitch combinations available from page 52 All other values result in an error message In OSET mode values outside the range in Table 6 produce an error message Command Line Error Messages are listed in Table 2 on page 27 Extended characters print at the print mode and pitch selected by the OSET command even if that mode and pitch differs from the currently selected print mode and pitch If the print mode differs between the extended and primary characters the first characte
264. ters are printed in condensed print until reset by ESC M ESC P the condensed print reset control code DC2 printer reset or a new print mode control code The Serial Matrix SI code hex OF is equivalent to the ESC SI code If condensed print is not allowed in the current print mode the code is ignored Example The following sample illustrates condensed character printing and reset CONTROL CODE SI SELECTS CONDENSED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE DC2 RESETS CONDENSED CHARACTER PRINTING Condensed Print Reset ASCII Code DC2 Hex Code 12 Dec Code 18 Purpose Resets condensed character printing to 10 cpi Comment The condensed print reset control code selects 10 cpi character pitch Other print attributes are not affected Other control code sequences which cancel condensed print are ESC M ESC P ESC or a new print mode control code 91 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Delete ASCII Code DEL Code 7F Dec Code 127 Purpose Deletes the previously received character on a line Comment Characters that have been truncated due to line length restrictions are not affected by this code Elongated Double High Print One Line Only ASCII Code ESC h Hex Code 1B 68 Dec Code 27 104 Purpose Selects elongated double high character printing for one line only Elongated characters are approximately double height but standard width Comment The elongated character
265. the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes IMPORTANT 154 The remainder of this chapter describes the Epson printer control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer in order to invoke and configure numerous Epson emulation functions Format for Control Code Descriptions The following information is listed for each code function where applicable ASCII Code The standard ASCII name for the control code Hex Code The control code numeric equivalent in hexadecimal Dec Code The control code numeric equivalent in decimal Purpose The function s of the control code Comment Any exceptions or limitations to use of the control code Example Where applicable we present a sample using the control code along with the result of running the program t dagger This symbol means the code produces non Epson behavior in your printer If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that are defined in the control code description unpredictable results may occur Escape Sequences An Epson control code consisting of more than one character is called an escape sequence because the first character in the sequence is always the ASCII ESCape character ESC alerts the printer that a special function command not printable characters follows The format for an Epson escape sequence is ESC parameter 1 parameter 2 parameter n For example to select emphas
266. the VFU is enabled the paper is moved to the next vertical tab position If a vertical tab format is not defined the paper is advanced to the next line at the current line spacing More information on vertical tabs is provided in the EVFU section of Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting CONTROL CODE ESC B 15 20 0 SETS A VERTICAL TAB AT LINE 15 AND AT LINE 20 CONTROL CODE VT MOVES PAPER TO THE NEXT VERTICAL TAB CONTROL CODE VT MOVES PAPER TO THE NEXT VERTICAL TAB THIS IS LINE TWENTY 57 Chapter 2 _ Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes 58 3 P Series XQ Printer Protocol Introduction This chapter describes the P Series XQ emulation host control codes Emulation refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language A printer control language is the coding system used to convey manipulate and print data Carriage Return print quality character attributes such as bold and underline margins and tabs are typical functions selected by printer control language codes In this manual the terms emulation printer protocol and printer control language are synonymous The P Series XQ emulation was devised for a series of Printronix printers manufactured between 1974 and 1991 but no longer available This emulation enables your printer to emulate Printronix P300 and P600 printers with A7 B10 boards To select the P Series XQ emulation mode as the active print
267. the optimize process may corrupt the printer s program If this occurs first attempt to repeat the downloading process If that fails contact an authorized service representative C P Series Plot Byte Definition A dot is printed at the location addressed by each of bits 1 through 6 in the data byte that is set 1 or True Consequently the binary equivalent of the plot data bytes must be known in order for specific dot positions to be addressed accurately The next page shows the P Series Plot Data byte dot patterns 289 Appendix C Table 81 Plot Data Byte Dot Patterns 24681012 DEC HEX ASCII BINARY a o a BINARY 2468 1012 BINARY 290 D Glossary Active column Active position ASCII Baud Bold Buffer A The horizontal location on the paper where the next character prints After printing a character the printer advances the active column The position on the paper where the next character prints The active position is defined by the horizontal position active column and the vertical position active line Abbreviation of American Standard Code for Information Interchange B A unit of speed that measures the rate at which information is transferred Baud rate is the reciprocal of the length in seconds of the shortest pulse used to carry data For example a system in which the shortest pulse is 1 1200 second operates at 1200 baud On RS 232 serial lines the ba
268. the seven bytes shown in Figure 29 the decimal values are computed as shown in Table 76 Table 76 Example Bit Image Pattern Decimal Values Bit Image Data Byte Decimal Weight Decimal Value 13 byte 64 8 1 73 ond byte 128 16 2 146 3 d byte 3244 36 4 byte 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 255 5th byte 32 4 36 6 byte 128 16 2 146 7 byte 64 4 8 1 73 Bit Image Density Bit Image Density Bit Image Graphics mode may be printed in different dot densities selected by the following control codes e ESC K selects the Single Density mode e ESC L selects the Double Density mode e ESC Y selects the Double Speed Double Density mode e ESC Z selects the Quad Density mode Bit Image Graphics mode was originally intended to be used on printers having 60 dpi or 120 dpi horizontal resolution and 72 dpi vertical resolution Other print modes can be used but the horizontal and or vertical dimension might change and or overlaps or gaps might appear For details concerning available modes see Chapter 4 Serial Matrix Printer Protocol Chapter 5 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Printer Protocol or Chapter 6 Epson FX 1050 Printer Protocol In Single Density Bit Image graphics from the Letter Gothic DP print mode printed dot density is 60 dots per inch dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically From the Courier NLQ print mode horizontal dot density is 120 dpi and vertical densit
269. tical Tabs Clear 133 Initialize Parameters 134 LING 2 NA EAEE 136 Line Feed n 216 Inch One Line 136 Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 1 137 Line Spacing 1 8 8 1 138 Line Spacing 7 72 Inch 10 3 138 Line Spacing n 72 Inch sss 139 Line Spacing n 216 Inch sse 140 Margins Left Right Set 140 GTI mM cc 141 Print Gontrol COES iirrainn ioni ima rcd 141 Print One Control Code ssssssssssseeeneeeen 141 Select Attributes tette ce hie ee ihn 142 Select Font Print Mode sse 143 Select Proportional 144 Superscript Subscript Printing essen 144 Superscript Subscript Printing 145 Super Set Commands sss 145 Table of Contents TOROF ONT ELIT UII 145 Underline tette tt Eu 146 Unidirectional Printing een 146 Vertical Tab accede edet ie E 146 Vertical Tab Set Clear sssssssssseeeeneeenene nnns 147 6 Epson FX 1050 Printer Protocol 14
270. tical Tabs in Channels Skip Over Perforation Skip Over Perforation Cancel Vertical Tab Execute Vertical Tab Set Clear Horizontal Motion 1 Backspace Carriage Return Character Pitch 10 cpi Character Pitch 12 cpi Character Pitch 15 cpi Horizontal Tab Execute Horizontal Tab Set Release Select Deselect Proportional Spacing Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position in 1 60 Inch Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1 120 Inch Set Margin Left Set Margin Right Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in 1 120 Inch ASCII CODE ESC C NUL n ESC b cnt n2n3 n18 NUL ESCNn ESC O VT ESC B n1 n2 nk NUL BS CR ESC P ESC M ESC g HT ESC D n1 NUL ESC pn ESC n1 n2 ESC SP n ESCIn ESCQn ESC n1 n2 157 PAGE 160 171 177 177 178 178 179 179 180 183 182 187 190 190 191 192 192 195 195 159 160 161 161 161 175 175 187 188 188 189 189 191 Chapter 6 158 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes FUNCTION Emphasis T T Condensed Print Condensed Print Reset Double High Print Set Reset Double Strike Double Strike Cancel Double Wide Print Double Wide Print 1 Line Double Wide Print 1 Line Cancel Emphasized Print Emphasized Print Cancel Italic Printing Italic Printing Cancel Superscript and Subscript Printing Superscript and Subscript Printing Cancel Underline Print Quality Control r 6 Re Defi
271. tion of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol The readable field prints left aligned below the bar code structure 222 Codabar Codabar The Codabar structure is shown in Figure 7 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT 1 NW OPEN IHRE M UPPER GUARD BAND I pu QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET NE al LOWER GUARD BAND L OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 7 Codabar Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent standard alphanumeric characters Each wide or narrow bar or space is one element each character in the data field has nine elements The structure is three wide elements bars or spaces out of the nine total elements which compose one character Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable
272. to a class or type of item The first character in the data field is used as the number system character Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent a limited character set numbers 0 9 and Special Characters Start Center and Stop The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven modules The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right data field to permit read direction sensing 251 Chapter 7 252 Bar Codes Readable Data The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The number system character is included in the check digit algorithm The UPC E bar code structure is shown in Figure 23 and described below SR SC START STOP POSITION DAE SODE eo a i l Quiet 25r ZONE HEIGHT l pc Um CODE Y L Bie oe eee NUMBER SYSTEM DIG C MASTER CHARACTER FIELD DATA FIELD CHARACTER Figure 23 UPC E Structure Quiet Zone Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin and end in a blank area You must provide sufficient space minimum of seven modules on the
273. to the next horizontal tab stop Comment Power on default horizontal tabs are set at every eighth character in the Serial Matrix printer protocol If there are no horizontal tabs set or the logical printhead is located at the last character column the code is ignored and no movement occurs Horizontal tabs are stored as a relative position therefore character pitch changes change horizontal tab positions See Horizontal Tab Set below to set new tab positions Horizontal Tab Set ASCII Code ESC D n1 nk NUL Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example 1B 44 n1 nk 00 27 68 n1 nk O Sets up to 32 horizontal tab positions n1 through n32 specify the character column of the tab positions NUL is the sequence terminator Up to 32 different tab positions may be set The values must be listed in ascending order or they are ignored The physical tab position is the product of n and the current cell width 1 pitch excluding double wide Tabs in excess of 32 or those positioned beyond the paper s right margin are also ignored Tab positions may be cleared by sending the ESC D NUL sequence Powering the printer on off initializes the tabs to every eighth character column Horizontal tabs are accessed by control code HT The following example illustrates horizontal tab setting and accessing CONTROL CODE ESC D CHR 4 CHR C10 CHR CO SETS TAB STOPS AT COLUMNS 4 AND 10 CONTROL CODE HT ACCESSES THE
274. trix 91 Condensed Print Reset Epson 164 Proprinter XL 127 Serial Matrix 91 CONFIG Command Summary 287 Configuration printer 21 Control code description format Epson FX emulation 154 P Series emulation 26 P Series XQ 62 Serial Matrix emulation 78 Control Code Functions Epson 154 Proprinter XL 116 P Series 26 Control Code Header Proprinter XL 116 P Series 26 Serial Matrix 78 Control Code Reference Index Epson 157 Proprinter XL 117 P Series 28 P Series XQ 64 Serial Matrix 79 Control Panel Menu 21 Cut Sheet Paper Feed Control Epson 164 D Default values Epson FX 1050 emulation 150 Proprinter IIl XL emulation 114 P Series emulation 24 P Series XQ emulation 60 Serial Matrix emulation 76 Define a Download Character Epson 164 Delete P Series XQ 68 Serial Matrix 92 Delete Character Epson 164 Deselect Printer Proprinter XL 128 Double High Print Set Reset P Series 39 Serial Matrix 93 Double High Print 1 line P Series 38 Serial Matrix 92 Double High Print Set Reset Epson 165 Double Strike Epson 165 Double Strike Cancel Epson 166 Double Wide Print Epson 166 Proprinter XL 129 P Series 41 Serial Matrix 95 Double Wide Print 1 line Epson 167 Proprinter XL 130 P Series 41 Serial Matrix 95 EAN 13 235 EAN 8 234 Edit Mode P Series XQ 63 Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU P Series XQ 68 Elongated Characters P Series XQ 69 Elongated Print Set Rese
275. trix Emulation with Control Codes 78 Format for Control Code 78 Escape Control Code 78 Attribute Set and Reset 78 Control Code INdOX eret ire 79 Backspace oi oie e o edo Dee 80 Bell zziz oid aic a dette e teet 81 Bit Image Mode Single Density sse 81 Bit Image Mode Double 82 Bit Image Mode Double Density Double 82 Bit Image Mode Quadruple Density 83 Bold Print SeL na td eee ndi 83 Bold Print Reset eite tetro tene aa ee 84 Gancel ziii ch ED a t e edat te A 84 Carriage el hie cn e ee eU c beg e 85 Character Pitch 10 cpi ssssssseeeeeeeenennens 85 Character Pitch 12 cpi 86 Character Set Select 86 Characters 80 9F Control Codes sss 88 Characters 80 9F Printable 89 Characters 80 9F Printable 89 Character Set Select International Languages 90 Condensed Print Maie e du 91 Con
276. ts as printable characters Comment This is the default when the IBM PC character set code page 0437 is selected as the default set at the operator panel Table 40 shows the hex 80 9F printable characters for the Epson character set and for the IBM PC graphic character set 180 Make Hex 80 9F Printable Table 40 Epson Printable Codes Hex 80 9F KEY B7 B6 BITS P5 B4 B3 B2 B1 OCTAL DECIMAL HEX B8 7 B6 B B6 BITS BITS B3 B2 B1 B4 B3 B2 B1 8 Epson USA Character Set IBM 437 Code Page 181 Chapter 6 182 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Master Print Select ASCII Code ESC n Hex Code 1B21n Dec Code 2733n Purpose Selects or changes print attributes in a single command where n an 8 bit number with the bits set to specify print attributes as shown in Table 41 Table 41 Master Print Select Bit Values Bit No Bit 0 1 0 10 t 12 cpi 1 Monospaced Proportional 2 Normal Condensed 3 Normal Emphasized 4 Normal t Double Strike 5 Normal Double Wide 6 Normal Italic 7 Underlined Comment Emphasized is substituted for double strike Graphics and grey scale characters are not underlined Proportional spacing overrides condensed or 12 cpi printing if both are selected ESC n SELECTS MULTIPLE ATTRIBUTES WITH ONE COMMAND FOR
277. ture control character pairs 226 Code 93 Code 93 The Code 93 bar code structure is shown in Figure 9 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT POSITION gt eure NS 1 1 UPPER GUARD BAND l m 1 QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET ZONE CODE CODE zoNE HEIGHT J LOWER GUARD BAND L J OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 9 Code 93 Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code Code 93 Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent an extensive character set The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The start code is included in t
278. ud rate equals the data flow rate in bits per second bps To communicate properly a printer must be configured to operate at the same baud rate as its host computer A typeface with a heavy line thickness produced by a double strike print method See also character weight Compare with shadow printing A reserved area in printer memory that data is written to and read from during data transfers 291 Appendix D 292 Character Character cell Character Library Character Location Character set Character weight Code Point Command sequence Compressed cpi C A graphical representation of data The invisible rectangular space occupied by a character including the white space around the character Used as a unit of spacing The height of a cell is equal to the current line spacing and the width of a cell remains constant even with changes in the current character spacing The collection of all the glyphs for all fonts The location of a character in a font The location of a character is the same in all fonts A protocol instructing the printer how to construct a set of printable characters including symbols punctuation numbers diacritical markings and alphabet characters Each character is assigned a unique address in memory The degree of lightness and thickness of printed text For example Bold refers to a heavy or thick character weight Medium normal or book weight refer to the charact
279. use your ASCII Emulation software Chapter 1 18 Introduction Notes And Notices For your safety and to protect valuable equipment it is very important that you read and comply with all information highlighted under notes and notices DANGER gt lt gt The word Danger next to the lightning slash indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury Danger and Caution notices are numbered to help you find the translated versions in the IBM 4400 Safety Notices booklet CAUTION gt lt gt The word Caution next to the exclamation point indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause moderate or minor personal injury CAUTION gt lt gt The word Caution next to this symbol indicates a heavy assembly that requires two or more persons to lift or hold CAUTION p lt gt The word Caution next to this symbol indicates a part or assembly that is hot enough to burn you Notes And Notices lt gt The word Caution next to this symbol indicates a part or assembly that is sharp enough to cut you CAUTION lt gt The word Caution next to this symbol indicates the presence of laser radiation NEVER look directly into laser light ATTENTION The word Attention indicates the possibility of damage to a program device system or data IMPORTANT The word Important indicates information vital to proper operation of the printer NOTE A
280. usive right to use or distribute the information in any way IBM or IBM Printing Systems Division believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2000 2003 All rights reserved Note to U S Government Users Documentation related to restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Notices References in this publication to IBM products programs or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only IBM s product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any of the intellectual property rights of IBM may be used instead of the IBM product program or service The evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products except those expressly designated by IBM are the responsibility of the user IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document The furnishing of this document does not give any license to use these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to the IBM Director of Commercial Relations IBM Corporation Purchase NY 10577 U S A Trademarks and Service Marks The following term
281. ust be entered while all parameters associated with that command are shown in italics Optional parameters are enclosed in brackets IMPORTANT Spaces are used only to visually separate the command parameters but do not enter these spaces in your command Table 60 Available Bar Codes Bar Code Mnemonic Code Set de Australian 4 State SSCC cH Variable Alphanumeric 222 Codabar SSCCcB Variable Alphanumeric 223 Code 39 SSCCcC Variable Alphanumeric 225 Code 93 SSCC c 9 Variable Alphanumeric 227 Code 128 SSCC Variable Alphanumeric 229 EAN 8 SSCC c 8 7 digits Numeric 234 EAN 13 SSCC c 1 12 digits Numeric 235 FIM SSCC c F N A B C or D 236 German l 2 5 SSCC c G 11 or 13 digits Numeric 238 Interleaved 2 5 55 Variable Numeric 238 Maxicode SSCCcX Variable Alphanumeric 239 MSI SSCCcM 13 or 14 digits Numeric 241 PDF 417 SSCC c 4 Variable Alphanumeric 242 PostBar SSCC c O Variable 0 3 243 POSTNET SSCC c P 5 9 or 11 digits Numeric 244 Royal Mail SSCC c R Variable Alphanumeric 243 Telepen SSCCcT Variable Alphanumeric 245 UCC EAN 128 SSCCcV Variable Numeric 246 UPC A SSCC cA 11 digits Numeric 251 UPC E SSCC cE 11 digits Numeric 252 UPC Shipping SSCC cS 13 digits Numeric 255 UPS 11 SSCC c U 10 digits Alphanumeric 256 217 Chapter 7 Codes Bar Code Format ASCII Code SSCC c t d datad N xxxx yyyy X mmmm P p hh E D Hex Code SSCC 63 t3B d dat
282. with decimal values ranging from 0 through 255 Plotting a Bit Image Pattern A Bit Image pattern can be developed as follows 1 Lay out the graphic to be printed on a quadrille pad or graph paper 2 Determine the decimal equivalence of each bit image data byte required to produce the pattern 3 Write a program to generate the complete pattern 4 Enter and run the program on the host computer Figure 29 illustrates steps 1 and 2 Eight vertical cells are used to create the Bit Image pattern corresponding to the eight bits of the vertically rotated data byte Dots are placed in the cells to provide a visual representation of the graphic to be printed Each dot corresponds to a 1 or true bit in the data byte In this example seven Bit Image data bytes are required to create the dot pattern These seven data bytes must be specified in the written program step 3 to generate the entire pattern 259 Chapter 8 260 Bit Image Graphics 1st Bit Image Data Byte 2nd Bit Image Data Byte Decimal 7th Bit Image Data Byte Weights 73 l 36 73 Decimal 146 255 146 Values Figure 29 Bit Image Pattern Plan A bit image pattern is easily defined by determining the decimal equivalent of the binary data byte This decimal value may then be included in a program data statement that generates the final Bit Image pattern To determine the decimal value of a data byte the decimal weights for each dot are added together For
283. x 78 Start Load Code EVFU 273 Superscript and Subscript Printing Epson 193 Superscript and Subscript Printing Cancel Epson 193 Superscript Subscript Printing Proprinter XL 144 310 P Series 55 Serial Matrix 108 Superscript Subscript Printing Reset Proprinter XL 145 P Series 55 Serial Matrix 108 Super Set Commands bar codes creating 218 Calibrate 209 Changing Printer Protocol 216 Character Set Selection 198 Character Spacing n 240 201 Clip Page 209 Error Recover 209 Font Selection 201 Font Size 202 Form Length and Width 204 Horizontal Image Shift 210 Horizontal Movement 205 Host Form Size 205 how to use 197 Image Width 210 Line Spacing n 288 206 Linefeed 210 Media Handling 211 Media Sensor 211 Offline 211 Paper Cut 212 Paper Feed Shift 212 Paper Length 212 PCX Data 206 Plot Attributes 213 Power Saver Time 213 Print Count 214 Print Intensity 214 Print Mode 214 Print Speed 214 Proprinter XL 145 P Series 56 Reboot 214 Selecting Page Orientation 207 Serial Matrix 109 Slew Speed 215 Software Page Eject 216 Tear Strip Time 215 TrueType Fonts 203 Vertical Image Shift 215 Syntax bar codes 218 Tab Horizontal Epson 175 Proprinter XL 132 Serial Matrix 99 Tab Vertical Epson 195 Proprinter XL 146 P Series 57 Serial Matrix 110 Tear Strip Time Super Set Commands 215 Telepen 245 Top of Form Set Prop
284. xample of expanded printing see Expanded Double Wide Print on page 41 EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING FOR ONE LINE ONLY 41 Chapter 2 _ Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Extended Character Set ASCII Code SO Shift Out SFCC SO SFCCn SFCC 4 Hex Code OE SFCC 0E SFCC 6E SFCC 34 Dec Code 14 SFCC 14 SFCC 110 SFCC 52 Purpose the extended character set in the range hex 0 through FF using codes hex 20 through 7F Comment Used in 7 bit systems as if data bit 8 was set to 1 For example sending code hex 20 accesses the symbol at code point hex AO If a printable symbol is not available at the code point a space is printed SFCC 4 is not cancelled by the next paper motion command OE SFCC OE SFCC 6E are cancelled by paper motion Example The following sample illustrates Extended Character Set CONTROL CODE ESC 4 SELECTS THE EXTENDED CHARACTER SET AND ESC 5 SELECTS THE PRIMARY CHARACTER SET WHICH IS DISPLAYED BENEATH THE EXTENDED CHARACTER SET AAAAAKCEEEET TTIDNO O O00x000 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Extended Character Set Cancel Primary Character Set Select ASCII Code SI Shift In SFCC SI SFCC o SFCC 5 Hex Code OF SFCC OF SFCC 6F SFCC 35 Dec Code 15 SFCC 15 SFCC 111 SFCC 53 Purpose Cancels Extended Character Set as selected by SO SFCC SO SFCC n and SFCC 4 and selects the Primary Character Set Comment Used 7 bit systems If data bit 8 is disabled this co
285. y YYMMDD n2 n6 20 Product Variant n2 n2 21 Serial Number n2 an 20 22 HIBCC Quantity Date Batch and Link n2 an 29 23 Lot Number Transitional Use n3 n 19 240 Additional Product ID Assigned By Manufacturer n3 an 30 250 Secondary Serial Number n3 an 30 30 Quantity n2 n 8 310 Net Weight Kilograms n4 n6 311 Length or 1st Dimension Meters n4 n6 312 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Meters n4 n6 313 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Meters n4 n6 314 Area Square Meters n4 n6 315 Volume Liters n4 n6 316 Volume Cubic Meters n4 n6 320 Net Weight Pounds n4 n6 321 Length Or 1st Dimension Inches n4 n6 322 Length Or 1st Dimension Feet n4 n6 323 Length Or 1st Dimension Yards n4 n6 324 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Inches n4 n6 325 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Feet n4 n6 326 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Yards n4 n6 327 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Inches n4 n6 328 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Feet n4 n6 329 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Yards n4 n6 330 Gross Weight Kilograms n4 n6 331 Length or 1st Dimension Logistics n4 n6 332 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Meters Logistics n4 n6 333 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Meters Logistics n4 n6 334 Area Square Meters Logistics n4 n6 335 Gross Volume Liters n4 n6 336
286. y is 144 dpi The Double Density mode prints up to twice the number of dots per inch horizontally up to 120 dpi from the Letter Gothic DP mode The vertical dot density remains the same as in the Single Density mode Double horizontal density requires twice the number of input data bytes to print the same length line as Single Density When the Double Density Double Speed control code is received the data can be printed at up to double the current horizontal dot density but all adjacent dots are removed which affects the final density of the printed image Quad Density characters are processed the same as Double Density characters Each character is stored in successive dot columns and successive pairs of data characters are logically OR ed together Quad horizontal density requires twice the number of input data bytes to print the same length line as Double Density 261 Chapter 8 262 Bit Image Graphics Bit Image Programming Format The syntax of the Bit Image expression must include the appropriate dot density control code the exact number of data bytes to be plotted and the data themselves The general Bit Image expression is as follows ESC CC n1 n2 DATA where ESC the Epson Serial Matrix or Proprinter XL compatible header CC L Y or Z to select dot density K single L double Y double density double speed and Z quad density n1 n2 the number of data bytes to be printed data the dot

IBM 4400 Laptop User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents